Completeenglishg00hoenrich PDF

W^^'
UC-NRLF
B M
3DS M7D
mMM
Y~-
r'
h--^
".
RICAN
BOOK
O M F> A N Y
.^
M^^
^^,
itKll|
LIBRARY
UNJVfR.MTY Of
CALIrOi?N{A
(J^_A^c)^
<)
y^-JJ^^
COMPLETE
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
FOR
COMMON AND HIGH SCHOOLS

BY
E.
J.
HOENSHEL,
A.M.
LATE PRESIDENT OF KANSAS NORMAL COLLEGE, AND

AUTHOR OF "PRACTICAL LESSONS IN ENGLISH"
o>Hc
NEW YORK
CINCINNATI
CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
ftWXfSYCH
o,n)
j3C/3Ck
Copyright,
By
E.
1895, 1897, 1907,
HOENSHEL.
J.
HOBNSHEL ENG. GRAM.

E
[.
PREFACE
This text-book
revised
of
grammar has been thoroughly

in new type.
It forms a
and entirely reset
complete book, containing
one volume the work
in
usually found in books on language lessons
and English
grammar.
The book
is
a course by
same
divided into four parts, each of which
itself.
subjects, but
The
first
three parts treat of the
each gives a more comprehensive
treatment than the preceding.
nary school
is
completed
only with the most
is
in
The work
Part Three.
difficult topics
of the ordi-
Part Four deals
and those about which
authors do not agree.
The author has no sympathy with the notion that

technical terms in grammar should not be used until the
pupil has reached the upper grades.
reason
terms
why
7to?in
word and
He
can see no
children cannot learn and understand the
and
verd, for instance,
action-word.
as easily as
name-
Therefore, technical work will
be found in Part One, gradually becoming more
diffi-
cult as the pupil advances, until in Part Four will be
found about
all
the technical
work required
examination.
3
7297
for
any
PREFACE
It is believed that pupils
the beginning of the

four years, the
work
should begin this book about
During the
Fifth Grade.
in
language
with the work in other studies, or
first
may be combined
it may be given in
special oral lessons.
The distinguishing characteristics of the book are

1.
The division into four parts, or courses.
language
lessons
and
combination of
2. The
:
grammar.
3.
The
careful
development
of
definitions
and
statements.
4.
and
5.
6.
The
use of brief and terse language
in definitions
rules.
The
The
logical
models for analysis and parsing.
simplest and most comprehensive system of
diagram known.
SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS
This book combines
To be
theoretical.
in
both
the
practical
harmony with
its
and the
spirit,
much
writing will be required of the pupil.
But few subjects and outlines for composition work

are given.
topics
It is believed that
each teacher can select
and surroundings
better suited to the capacity
of his pupils than the topics selected
should
Letter-writing
course, and should
be
by any author.
introduced early in the
be continued until the pupil can
write a neat and correct letter.

It will
be noticed that the pupil
sentences illustrating
should
These
ished.
pupils
It
if
required to write
and
prin-
be increased rather than diminsentences written
illustrative
may be used
parsing,
is
of the definitions
This part of the work should not be
ciples given.
omitted.
many
for additional
work
in
by
analysis
the
and
the teacher thinks those given in the book
are not sufficient.
The book
lessons
is
contain
divided into lessons, but

material
sufficient
for
many
of these
two or three
recitations.
The models
for
parsing should
5
not
be neglected.
SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS
Long experience
in schools of various
vinced the author that parsing pays
grades has con-
when
it
is
well
done, and that there cannot be good parsing unless a

definite
and logical order
Attention
is
is
used.
The system
called to the diagrams.
simple, yet comprehensive.
It
is
comes nearer indicating
the part of speech of every word than any other system
known to
gram the
the author.
sentence, but
The aim should be, not to diaThe diagram is

to analyze it.
only an aid to analysis.
The
this
pupil that has mastered the
book
Four
is
will
have a
fair
knowledge
first
of
three parts of
grammar.
intended only for advanced students.
Part
CONTENTS
PART ONE
PAGES
Suggestions to Teachers
II
Index
Nouns
Names and
Name and
21,22
22, 23
Initials
Address
24, 25
Are, Was, and

Nouns Meaning More than One
Statements with
Is,
Were
25,
27
28
Review
Have and Has
Review
Months and Days
Review
.
Dogs
29,
3^
33
34
35
Common
3^
37
Punctuation
Review
37> 3^
3^
39-41
The Cat (essay)

The Verb
The Command
4^
Declarative, Interrogative, Imperative

Sentences
Review, and Essay
Punctuation
.
The
30
3
32? 33
(essay)
Abbreviations
The Question
Nouns, Proper and
26
Adjective
Punctuation
Skating, and Riding a Bicycle (essay)
Review
Subject and Predicate
42
42
....
43
44
4^
46
46,47
48>49
45?
The Schoolroom (essay)

The Object
The Sentence (essay)
SO, s^
5^
52
The Verb
Review
53
7
CONTENTS
The Pronoun
The Adverb
Review
55.
5^
The Phrase
Review
........
.........
57
5^
The Preposition
The Conjunction
The Interjection
Quotation
Essay (The
Review.
Cow)
Diagrams
City or Country (essay)
59
60
61
62
63-65
65,66
67
PART TWO
Nouns
Classes of
Capitals
Gender
68,
and Punctuation
.
Person
Number
Review
The Nominative and Objective Case
The Possessive Case
Review
.
Classes of Phrases
Parsing
The Noun
(essay)
Classes of Pronouns
Correct Forms of Pronouns
Parsing
Review
The Pronoun (essay)
Capitals and Punctuation
.
Classes of Adjectives
Rules for Comparison
Review
Classes of Verbs
Voice
Mode
Review
Tense
Person and Number of Verbs
The
Infinitive
54
56
CONTENTS
9
PAGES
Parsing
Verbs
Review
The Verb (essay)
Corn (essay)
Classes and Comparison of Adverbs
The
Preposition
Review
The Conjunction and

Review.
the Interjection
114^115
11 5-1 18
"8
....
....
Analysis and Parsing. Diagraming
Grammar
1^8
19-122
122, 123
123, 124
125
126-129
129
(essay)
PART THREE
The Pronoun
The Adjective
130-132
132-134
134-136
136
1 37-139
14
141,142
143-^45
146-148
148-151
15^-^54
154-^57
157-167
168-174
Review
The Verb
Voice
i75-i79
179-181
Classes of Sentences
The Adjective Clause
The Adverb
Clause
Analysis
The Noun Clause

The Compound Sentence
Classes of Phrases
The Noun
Person and Number
Case
Review
Apposition.
The Possessive Case
175
^Tense, Person,
and Number
Verb and Subject
Some
Special Verbs
Conjugation
Review
The
The
182, 183
Mode
Infinitive
Participle
Review
The Adverb
The Preposition
The Conjunction
183-185
185-188
188-191
191-198
^99
200-204
204-209
209-211
211-216
216-218
218,219
CONTENTS
10
PAGES
220-222
222
223-225
226, 227
227-229
229-231
Correlatives
Interjections
Review
Words
as DiiTerent Parts of
Speech
Punctuation
Review
PART FOUR
Compound Sentences
Varieties of
Complex Sentences
of Dependent Clauses
Varieties of
Varieties
Phrases Classified
Form
Form
as to
as to
....
235^ 236
Gender and Number

Intransitive and Passive Verbs
Cases after
Difficult Case Constructions
240, 241
....
....
......
Objects
Outline of Noun
Sixteen Different Constructions of the
Noun
Possessive Pronouns
Restrictive Clauses
Use of That
As and But as Relative Pronouns

Compound Relatives
Agreement of Pronouns with Antecedent

Analysis and Parsing
Adjectives
Correcting and Parsing
....
....
Shall, Will', Should,
Mode
Woidd
Agreement of Verb with Subject

Infinitives and Participles
Outline of Verb
Modal Adverbs Classified
Conjunctive Adverbs
Improper Omission of Prepositions
Uses of As, Than, and Or
Difficult Sentences Analyzed and Parsed
Analysis and Parsing
.
Composition
242-244
245
246
248
249
249
250,251
251,252
253, 254
255-257
258-260
261
Verbs
Subjunctive
236-239
239, 240
241, 242
Peculiar Possessives
Two
233
234, 235
Peculiarities of
Verbs with
232
262-276
265-267
267, 268
269-271
272-274
274, 275
276
276, 277
279
279-281
282, 283
283-288
289-291
INDEX
PAGES
242, 280
Aj as a preposition
Abbreviations
Abstract nouns
Active voice
Adjective clauses
Phrases
34,
06,
Pronouns
84,
44, 45
180
133'
134
141, 281
96,
168
97-99, 169, 170

96, 168
96,
Descriptive
168
164
258
Interrogative
Modifying another
158
96 lOI, 168- 175, 258-260
Comparison of
Definitive
22,
107,
88, 89,
Adjectives
Classes of
70
68, 144
adjecti
168
Numeral
Parsing of
Predicate
45,
66
158
96, 168
Pronominal
Proper
Adverb clauses
Phrases
Adverbs
55
Classes of
100
211
119
134
36,
234
84,
22,
141
19,
Comparison of
277
211, 212
120, 212
15, 276,
19,
211, 276
Conjunctive
211
Interrogative
212, 276
Modal
121
Parsing of
Phrase
213
Relative
277
Simple
211
Pronoun with antecedent

Agreement
113,
Verb with subject
Among and between
91,
114,
148,
158, 253
85, 269,
270
217
12
INDEX
PAGES
Analysis
126, 136
INDEX
Common
Common
gender
nouns
Comparative degree of adjectives
Of adverbs
.
Comparison of adjectives
Of adverbs
Complements of incomplete verbs
Of passive verbs
Of transitive verbs
(active)
Complete verbs
Complex phrases
Sentences
Composition
Compound
personal pronouns
Phrases
Predicates
Propositions
Relative pronouns
Sentences
Subjects
Verbs
Concessive clauses
Conditional clauses
Conjugation
.
Oibe
Of love
Emphatic form of
Progressive form of
Conjunctive adverbs
Conjunctions
Classes of
Coordinate
Subordinate
Copulative verbs
Correlatives, uses of
Declarative sentences
.
Declension of pronouns
Defective verbs
Definitive adjectives
Demonstrative pronouns
Dependent clauses
Descriptive adjectives
INDEX
14
PAGES
Diagrams
65, 66, 83, 86,
128,
134,
135,
136,
138,
139
140, 142, 150, 151, 152, 159, 174, 203, 207, 208
210,
Difficult
221,
225,
230,
233,
247,
255, 275, 278
sentences analyzed and parsed
282-285
Diminutive nouns
144
Double relative
Each other
Emphatic form of verb
Exclamation
Exclamation point
Exclamatory sentences
157
284
198
125, 222
61,
222, 223
130
Expletive
124
Factitive object
243
Feminine gender
Fewer and
7h H4,
Finite verb
145
260
less
176, 263
Future-perfect tense
112.
184
Future tense
103
183
Gender
71
Common
Feminine
Masculine
Neuter
Gerunds
Homonyms
....
mode
Imperative
32, 34, 46,
237
72; 144
71 144
71 144
72, 144; 236; 237
273
49? 50, 60, 74. 77, 78
72,
44.
145' 236:
09, 182
In first and third persons

Sentences
Imperfect tense
Impersonal verbs
Improper omission of prepositions
263
42, 130
263
176
/;/
and
into
279
217
Incomplete verbs
Indefinite pronouns
262,
Indicative
mode
Infinitives
114,
As adjective
As adverb
As noun
.
Parsing of
Subject of
Initials
08,
158
182
-204, 272
200 -201
201, 202
201
200, 202
150, 272
23
INDEX
Inseparable phrases
15
INDEX
i6
PAGES
Non-restrictive clauses
Noun clauses
Noun phrases
Nouns
Abstract
133.
22, 68
Collective
Common
Parsing of
Number
68,
68, 143
144
of nouns and pronouns
27,
75-78
Of verbs
Numeral adjectives
.
Classes of
Object, factitive
144
144
86
85,
144
36, 68, 143
144
146-148, 237-238
84, 185, 269, 270
168
168
.
Participial
Proper
Verbal
141
143 157, 236-248
36, 68, 143
Diminutive
Material
249
137-139
133'
Of passive verb
Of preposition
Of verb
59:
Objective attribute
Objective case
79;
149:
243
243
79. 122, 149, 216
50, 79, 149
150, 243
150, 239, 242-244
After interjections
After intransitive verbs
Subject of infinitive
150,
150
Without a governing word

Or^ sometimes not a connective
149, 242
....
280, 281
168
Ordinals
Ought, not used with auxiliaries
190
100
Parsing of adjectives
Of adverbs
Of infinitives
Of nouns
Of participles
Of pronouns
Of verbs
121
200, 201
85,
92, 93
114,
As adjectives
As adverbs
As nouns
103
.
In passive voice of verb
86
205
Participles
244
239
104,
115
204-210, 272, 273

205, 206, 273
272, 273
206, 273
180
INDEX
Participles
17
In progressive form of verb

Parsing of
Passive voice
Formation of
.
Past tense
Past-perfect tense
23
Period, use of
24, 26, 34
Person of nouns and pronouns
Of verbs
Personal pronouns
Compound
Declension of
Personification
Phrase adverbs
Phrases
Adjective
57:
84,
41,
84,
Adverb
Complex
Compound
Infinitive
Inseparable
Noun
Participial
Prepositional
Separable
Simple
Pleonasm
Plural number
27. 75 -78
146-
Plurals of letters, figures, etc
Of titles
Of words ending in/and/^
Of words ending in o
Of words ending vay
Positive degree of adjectives
80
Possessive case
In joint ownership
Of appositives
.
Of compounds
Of compound terms
.
Possessive pronouns
Potential
mode
hoenshel's eng. gram,
81
54
INDEX
PAGES
Predicate
48
INDEX
19
PAGES
Rules for spelling
75^ 7^. 98, 99'
'46,
147
246
42, 130-140
131-130. 233-235
140, 232
Senator^ in different constructions
Sentences
Complex
Compound
42,
130
42,
ÎP
13
Interrogative
42,
13
Simple
Separable phrase
126,
Declarative
Exclamatory
Imperative
.....
Series
Shall ^nd Will, Should Tind

Simple adverb
Simple sentence
Simple phrase
.
Specification, clause of
Spelling, rules for
Statement
Subject, complex
Would
37
117,193,265-267
211
126,
235
^3^
Logical
Subject of sentence
Of
infinitive
Subjunctive
mode
Subordinate conjunction
Subordinate proposition
Suffix
235
235
4^
150
182, 267, 268
219
13^
.....
Superlative degree
vSurnames
97
98
169-174
22
^9^
Synopsis of verb
Teach and learji
Tense
^ ^
183,
184
io3'
in,
112,
183
184
263
Imperfect
Past
Past-perfect
11,
Present
Present-perfect
103, iii-ii3>
Future
Future-perfect
Uses of
131
235
234
75^ 76, 9^, 99^ H6, I47
26
Compound
General
131
236
11,
I03'
183
112.
183
103^
183
112,
183
264
INDEX
20
PAGES
I74
280
Than, as a conjunctive adverb
As a preposition
With comparatives
221, 259
161, 162, 249
That, uses of
The, as a conjunctive adverb
278
124
277, 278
105, 176, 239
264
39, 40, lo, 52, 103-118, 175-210
106-108, 179-181
113-115, 269, 270
176
262
262
216, 262
expletive
There
To-day
Transitive verbs
Uses of Tenses
Verbs
Active and passive
Agreement with subject
....
Auxiliary
Complement of
Complete and incomplete
Compound
191-198
262
1 88-191
Conjugation of
Copulative
Correct forms of
Defective
176
176, 263
Finite
Impersonal
176
Infinitives
Intransitive
Mode
of
Neuter
105, 176, 239

108-110, 182, 183, 267, 268
...
Number and person
of
114, 200-204, 272
176
.
114? i84 185, 269-271
113,
Parsing of
114, 115
Participles
103,
104, 204-210, 272
Progressive form of
Redundant
Regular and
Tense of
198
176
irregular
177-179
103, 111-113, 183, 184
105, 176
104,
Transitive
Synopsis of
Voice of
What
Will
a,
2ind shall,
Words
Ves,
relative
parsed together
no
176,
198
106-108, 179-181
106-108, 1 79-1 81
Voice, active and passive
What, double
175,
.......
Would 2in6. should
as different parts of speech
....
.
157
260
117, 193, 265-267
226, 227
277
PART ONE
LESSON I
NOUNS
1.
Write your name.
2.
Write the names of three
3.
Write the name of the
of
your friends.
city or
town
in or near
which you Uve.

4.
Write the name of some other town
in
your
county.
5.
Write the name of some place you would
like to
Write the names of three things you see
in the
visit.
6.
schoolroom.
7.
Write the names of three things you have
at
home.
8.
Write the names of three animals.
9.
Write the names of three things you can
10.
eat.
Write the names of two things a boy carries
his pocket.
21
in
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
22
Some words
The name
Names
in the
of a
your
person or place should begin with a capital.
Write four nouns that are the names of persons
have read.
Write four nouns that are the names of things

city.
Write two nouns that are the names of towns
II
INITIALS
name.
1.
Write your
2.
Write the name of your father.
3.
Write the name of your brother or
Which
The
in
state.
NAMES AND
the
cities
United States.
LESSON
all
of
Europe.
seen in a
15.
some are the names
of things.
are called nouns.
whom you
14.
of persons,
Write three nouns that are the names of
12.
of
names
Write three nouns that are the names of coun-
11.
tries in
13.
are the
and some are the names
places,
part of the
members
last
full
names you have
sister.
just written is the
of the family?
name
is called
the family
name
or surname.
same
for
NAMES AND
The
first
person
name
is called
INITIALS
the given
name
may have more than one
23
or the Christian name.
Christian
name
as,
William
Henry Khig, Oliver Hazard Perry Fulton.

4.
Write the name of some one that has two Chris-
names.
tian
5.
Write the name again, using only the
of each part of the Christian

6.
letter
first
name.
Write the name of the most populous State
in
the United States.

7.
Write
it
again, using only the
first
letter of
each
part of the name.
The
first letter of
a word
are used instead of the
is called its initial
name
When
of a person or place,
initials
they should
be capitals, and a period should be placed after each.

8.
Write the name of the smallest State
in the
United
States.
9.
Write
it
again, using only the
first letter
of each
part of the name.

10.
Write the
initials of
your name.
11.
Write the
initials of
the Governor of this State.
12.
Write the
initials of
the President of the United
13.
Write the
initials of
some
14.
Write the name of some
States.
railroad near you.

city,
state,
or county
that has two words in the name.

15.
Write the
written.
initials
of the
name you have
just
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
24
LESSON
III
NAME AND ADDRESS

Write your name and address
I.
thus,
iSiA/rnA/ru^Jixvyvv,
i;ou>cu.
Notice the use of
the
period
and comma
in
writing
the
address.
Write the name and address of some one who
2.
does not Hve in your town.
Write the name of some one, and draw one hne
3.
under the Christian name and two Hues under the
sur-
name.
4.
Write the
5.
Write the names of
6.
Name
your father's name.

five
schoolmates, and point
name and surname
out the given
jects are
initials of
of each.
the materials of which the following ob-
made
a shoe, a
bottle,
a coat, a hat.
NAME AND ADDRESS

Write the names of
7.
ing
is
25
five materials of
which cloth
made.*
Write the names of three materials of which
8.
money
9.
grow
is
made.
Write
in the
five
ground.
Write the
10.
nouns that are names of things that
initials of
these
names
John Henry Green, Richard Grant White, Henry Ward

Beecher, Robert Johnson.
11.
Write your name and address.
12.
Write your teacher's name and address.
LESSON IV
STATEMENTS WITH
1.
thus, "
2.
Name
IS,
ARE, WAS, AND
an animal, and
The dog
tell
WERE
something about
it
barks."
Tell something about
a cat, a horse, birds.

3.
State something about
a tree, a book, boys.
* In writing the
twice.
ble.
In
all
nouns asked
for,
pupils should not use the
written work, repetition should be avoided as
In trying to think of
new
same noun
much
as possi-
words, they will be learning to think,
be increasing their vocabulary, and
will
be learning to
spell.
will
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
26
group of words so arranged as to
tell
something
is
statement
A statement
should begin with a capital and close with a
period.
Write a statement about
4.
flowers, chalk, a fish, a squirrel, a river.
Write a statement about yourself.
5.
What word
The word
/,
did you use instead of your
used for your
own name,
own name
should be a capital
letter.
Use the word
6.
/,
and make a statement
Three things you saw on your way
2.
Two
things you like to do.
3.
One
thing you like to eat.
to school.
Write two statements, using the word
7.
telling
is in
each
statement.
8.
Write two statements, using the word are
in
each
in
each
statement.
9.
Write two statements, using the word was
statement.
10.
Write two statements, using the word
zuere
in
each statement.
11.
is
Write a statement about corn and wheat, using
or are.
12.
7(jas
Write a statement about Henry and James, using
or were.
Use
is
and was when speaking or writing of one.
Use are and were when speaking

one.
or writing of
more than
NOUNS MEANING MORE THAN ONE
2^
LESSON V
NOUNS MEANING MORE THAN ONE
1.
Something that swims.

Something that lives in the air.
Something that burrows in the ground.
Something that a farmer raises.
Something for which your state is noted.
Something seen in the sky.
Something found in the mountains.
Something found in the forest.
Some animal that has different homes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
for winter
and
summer.
10.
2.
Change these nouns

boy,
What
3.
useful metal.
girl, bird,
letter did
to
mean more than one
flower, apple.
you add to make them mean more than one
Copy the following

one box
two boxes
What was added
to
a dress
one inch
several dresses
many
the above nouns to
inches
make them mean more
than one?
To nouns ending
mean more than one.
4.
in
s,
sh, ch, or
Change these nouns
than one
to
x we add
es to
make them
make them mean more
fox
match
dish
church
bench
watch
glass
bush
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
28
LESSON
VI
REVIEW
1.
Fill these
1.
2.
is
too short.
This pencil
4.
5.
The
good boys.
in the house.
singing.
birds
6.
the birds singing
7.
the apples ripe
8.
9.
The book
The trees
Write the
or are:
not ripe.
John and Robert

The dog or the cat
3.
2.
blanks with
These peaches
lost.
tall.
above
statements
again,
filling
the
blanks with was or were.

3.
Change
is to
are,
and are
to
is,
and write these
statements correctly
4.
The apple is sour.

The benches are long.
These men are sick.
The gate is made of iron.
5.
Those oxen
1.
2.
3.
6.
7.
8.
4.
are black.
The man is rich.

The bunches are too large.
The stove is made of iron.
Change was
to ivere,
and were
to was,
these statements correctly

1.
2.
3.
4.
The
The
The
The
boys were
sick.
mouse was
afraid of the cat.
ducks were swimming
man was
a soldier.
in the
pond.
and write
HAVE AND HAS

6.
The egg was in the nest.

The bridges were old.
7.
Was
8.
Were
5.
the stone in the water

the geese white
29
LESSON
VII
HAVE AND HAS

1.
Copy
these
statements, and notice carefully the
use of have and has

1.
The
2.
Girls have dolls.
girl
has a doll.
3.
He
4.
They have
5.
has torn his book.

torn their books.
have a knife.
Use has when speaking
or writing about one.
Use have when speaking or writing about more than
one, or
about yourself.
2.
Use have
or has^
and make a statement about
children, men, coach, sled.

3.
Write three statements, using the word has
in
Write three statements, using the word have
in
each,
4.
each.
5.
Fill these
1.
Birds
2.
The
3.
blanks with have or has:

claws.
little girls
three books.
gone
to school.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
30
gone home.
The boy
come back.
Lucy or Mary
come back,
Lucy and Mary
4.
5.
6.
6.
7.
the doors hinges
8.
the lion a
Change have
mane
to has^
?
?
and has
to have^
and write
these sentences correctly
The book has leaves.

The ships have sails.
The child has been crying.
The boys have gone.
The chicken has feathers.
Has the boat arrived ?
Have the mice been caught
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
LESSON
VIII
REVIEW
1.
Use
is
or are, and write a statement beginning
with
we, she, he, they, you,
it.
2.
Write the statements again, using zvas or
3.
Use have
with
and make a statement beginning
I,
4.
or has,
zvere.
Fill
you, we, they, apples.
each of these blanks with three of the follow-
ing words (one at a time):
is,
are, has, have,
was, were.
Complete the statements by adding other words.

1.
2.
Many
tall
tree
beautiful flowers
MONTHS AND DAYS

3.
4.
5.
6.
31
A dog and a cat My mother and I

The
The
bicycle
street cars
LESSON IX
MONTHS AND DAYS
1.
Write the names of

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The days of the week.

The four seasons.
The three winter months.
The three spring months.
The three summer months.
The three fall months.
The names
of the
months and the days
of the
week should
begin with capitals, but the names of the seasons should not.
2.

1.
This month.
2.
This season of the year.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.
The
The
The
The
first
last
month of the year.

month of the year.
shortest month.
hottest
month.
Write a statement naming the different parts of
penknife.
4.
Write statements
5.
Write a statement
6.
Combine your statements
telling the use of
each
part.
telling the use of a knife.
story or essay about a knife.
so that they will
form a
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
32
LESSON
REVIEW
1.
Write a statement, using a noun that
the
is
name
of
a flower, a bird, a
fish,
an
insect, a tree, a vegetable, a fruit,
a mineral.
2.
Write a statement about something that
is
made
of
iron, leather, wool, cotton, bone, gold.
3.
Use each
Use
a different
of the following
words
in a statement.
noun for each statement.
high, low, green, white, black, blue, yellow, red, brown,

long, short, slow, swift, straight, crooked, useful, hot,
cold, beautiful, sharp, square, gentle, sweet, bitter, sour.
LESSON XI
REVIEW
1.
Use
these words correctly in statements
ate, eight
do,
beech, beach
2.
Try
statement
to use
;
as,
*'
new, knew blue, blew

knows, nose pane, pain.
dew
;
lore, four
each pair of the above words in one
The boy
ate eight walnuts."
jL^Crty^
ESSAY
33
3.
Give four rules for the use of capitals.
4.
When
should you use
is ?
arc ?
was
were
has
have ?
5.
Write a
something that
statement telling
you
learn
by seeing, by hearing, by
6.
Use each
what each
is,
words
of these
or to
what
tasting,
it
by
feeling.
in a statement, telling
belongs
claws
sole
fur
wrist
gable
fleece
mane
horns
paws
bill
spur
belfry
LESSON
XII
DOGS
1.
about
Write one or more statements telling something
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
The
The
The
The
size.
color.
different kinds.
covering of the body.
5.
How
6.
Their use.
7.
they defend themselves.
dog you have seen
Arrange and combine
or heard of.
all
your statements so that
they will form a story or essay about dogs.

3.
After you have combined your statements, rewrite
your story as plainly and as neatly as you can, paying

particular attention to your spelling.
hoenshel's eng. gram.
iM
-x
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
34
LESSON
XIII
ABBREVIATIONS
1.
Use
these words correctly in statements
bow, bough
sow
2.
3.
4.
Fill
die,
stake, steak
dye
here, hear
He went
2.
The
3.
This lesson
4.
The man was
hymn
so,
sew
to, too,
or two
sick
go.
long.
is
walk
old
miles.
blanks with here or hear :
1.
My
2.
Did you
3.
father
will
him,
two.
the door.
girl is
Fill these
to, too,
each of these blanks with
was
to-day.
the organ
and
stand
what you say.
Sometimes we use more than one
instead of using only the

is
some, sum
initial.
letter of a
name,
This shortened form
called an abbreviation.
5.
6.
Learn these abbreviations
Note.
7.
period should be used after each abbreviation.

:
Oct.
Jan.
Apr.
Feb.
Aug.
Nov.
Mar.
Sept.
Dec.
May,
June, and July should not be abbreviated.
The following
week
of the
are the abbreviations for the days
Sun.
Tues.
Thurs.
Man.
Wed.
Fri.
Sat.
::
THE QUESTION
35
LESSON XIV
THE QUESTION
Copy
1.
Was Mary
2.
Can Henry read?
here
question should begin with a capital and close with a ques-
A
tion
and examine them closely
tliese questions,
mark
2.
bell,
a tiger, the sun, glass, school.
Write a question using the word

is,
4.
Write a question about

a
3.
(interrogation point)
are, have, was, were,
I,
he, they, you.
Change these statements
to questions using the
same words
2.
This little boy is asleep.

His name is Victor.
3.
He
1.
5.
will
not sleep long.
Change these questions
to
statements, using the
same words
6.
1.
Is the
man
2.
Has a
bird wings?
3.
Are China and Japan
at
home?
at
war?
Write a question (make a problem) asking
the cost of
1.
2.
3.
Three pencils at five cents each.

Four bushels of wheat at $1.25 a bushel.
Seven primers at twenty cents each.
for
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
36
LESSON XV
NOUNS, PROPER AND COMMON
1.
Copy
1.
2.
these statements
dog can run.

Towser can run.
Are dog and Towser both nouns

tween them ? *
A
as,
noun that belongs
to
What
is
the diiference be-
some particular one is
di
proper noun;
Towser, Robert, Chicago.
A name
that belongs to
any one
of a class is a
common noun ;
as, dog, boy, city.
A
2.
proper noun should begin with a capital letter.
Copy
these names, placing the proper nouns in
one column and the

London
3-
common nouns
dog
in
another
PUNCTUATION
The
The
3.
4.
37
farmer raises wheat and corn.

farmer raises wheat, corn, and oats.
You will notice that in the first and the third sentence there are
two words used alike, while in the second and the fourth there are
three words used alike.
Three or more words used in this way
are called a
se?'ies.
More than two words
of the
same kind following one
after
another are called a series.
A comma
should be placed after each word of a series, ex-
cept the last.
The word and should be used only between the
last
two words
of a series.
5.
1.
Five things used in a kitchen.
2.
3.
Four kinds of trees.

Three things that are
4.
Two
black.
things a farmer raises.
LESSON XVI
REVIEW
1.
2.
Three winter amusements.
2.
Five domestic animals.
3.
Five wild animals.
five
things that are kept
in a grocery.
3.
as playthings.
five things that are
used
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
38
4.
in a
hardware
5.
five
things that are kept
store.
six
quadrupeds (four-
footed animals).
6.
six
kinds of trees.
7.
six
kinds of birds.
8.
Write a statement about four kinds of materials
used
in building houses.
9.
six things that are
used
for food.
10.
Write a statement about four kinds of meat.
11.
Write a question about two things that are kept
in a
drug
12.
store.
Write a question about two things that are used
for drink.
LESSON XVII
THE CAT
Write an essay about the
cat,
using the following
outline
1.
2.
3.
4.
The
The
The
The
size.
5.
color.
6.
The claws.
The covering
eyes.
7.
How
8.
Their use.
ears.
9.
How they
watch
of the body.
they defend themselves.
for their prey.
THE VERB
LESSON
39
XVIII
THE VERB
1.
Copy
these statements
1.
Birds sing.
2.
The wind
3.
Frogs jump.
Which
blows.
of the above words are nouns
Which words
express
action?
Words
2.
that express action are called verbs.
Supply verbs for these nouns
1.
Monkeys
2.
Fire
3.
Snow
'
3.
Supply nouns
1.
bloom.
2.
leap.
3.
4.
4.
Water
5.
Indians
6.
The
cars
for these verbs
7.
Wasps
8.
Lions
9.
Kites
cackles.
5.
crawl.
9.
6.
roars.
10.
neighs.
chirp.
7.
purs.
11.
laughs.
climb.
8.
hisses.
12.
dives.
Select the verbs and nouns in these statements
5.
The spider soon caught the fly.

The sun shone brightly on the lake.
The sailors sang joyfully.
Heavy masses of fog floated across the mountains.
The visitor passed through the gate.
6.
Swallows build nests under the eaves of houses.
2.
3.
4.
7.
8.
^.
10.
walked to the church.
The
The
The
river flows
down
the valley.
child
met me on the road.
blind
man
fell
into the river.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
40
LESSON XIX
CORRECT FORMS OF THE VERB
1.
Copy
carefully
these
statements, and examine the verbs
read.
1.
Birds sing.
5.
2.
The
6.
You
7.
He
8.
They
3.
4.
birds sing.
John and Mary go.

John goes.
Verbs add
s or es in
read.
reads.
read.
statements and questions about one.
Verbs do not add s or es when used with / or you in state-
ments and questions about
in
one.
2.
Write three statements about more than one.
3.
Write three statements, using a verb that ends
s.
4.
Write two statements, using a verb that ends
5.
Are any
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
of these statements incorrect
Judith and Lucy goes to school.

I
see you.
The children play ball.

The boys does not study.
The horse trots slowly.
Change these statements and questions

they shall speak of more than one
so that
6.
2.
The man walks fast.

The child goes to school.
3.
Does the boy study?
1.
in es.
THE COM iM AND
7.
4.
The lamb
5.
Does the
plays.
eagle fly?
Change these statements and questions
so
that
they shall speak of only one

1.
Do
2.
Indians hunt.
the
Germans
3.
Monkeys
4.
Do
5.
The mice go
music?
like
chatter.
geese live in the water?

into the trap.
06
7Kri?c4^
LESSON XX
THE COMMAND
1.
Copy
these groups of words
1.
Bring
2.
Do
me
your knife.
not swear, boys.
Do these groups state

Do they order or request
A
done
something
something
Do
they ask a question
be done?
to
group of words that orders or requests something to be

is
a command.
command should
begin with a capital and end with a
period.
2.
Copy
these
commands and
carefully the use of the
comma
Stella, close the door.
2.
Obey your
questions,
:
parents, children.
4.
Come and see me, Samuel, whenever you

Mother, may I go with you?
5.
Who
6.
Can
3.
and notice
wrote to you, Alice?

you, Jennie, solve this problem?
can.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
42
Write two commands and two questions using a
3.
proper noun for the
first
word
of each.
Write two commands and two questions using
4.
name
the
of
the person addressed for the last
word
of each.
Write two commands and two questions placing
5.
the
name
of the person addressed in the middle.
Statements, questions, and commands are all called sentences-
A statement is a declarative sentence.

A question is an interrogative sentence.
A command is an imperative sentence.
LESSON XXI
REVIEW
1.
Write a
sentence,
and
declarative
sentence,
an imperative
an
interrogative
sentence, with
these words
books
Albert
truth
children
mother
ink
APPLES
2.
Write sentences about apples,

1.
2.
3.
Where they grow.

What is outside.
What is inside.
telling
4-
Their colors.
5.
Their
6.
Their use.
size.
each of
:.
PUNCTUATION
43
LESSON XXII
PUNCTUATION
1.
2.
Notice the punctuation of these addresses

1.
1235 Vine St., Lincoln, Lancaster Co., Neb.
2.
Henry Long,
1.
3.
Burr Block. No. 356
called on Prof R P Brown

Mendon Westmoreland Co Pa
No 14 La Fayette Ave Charleston 111
Rev Mr Smith
Covington
Longwell Bridgeport N Y
4.
Office of Supt City Schools
5.
Mr James P
6.
5,
the following, and punctuate correctly
Copy
2.
3.
Esq., Room No.

Kansas Ave., Topeka, Kans.
James L Murdock
Mass
Copy
the
Room
following
Ky
21 Portland Building Boston
sentences,
and
punctuate
correctly
1.
Mr
2.
Children are you always obedient to your teacher
may John be excused from
3.
Charles can see hear
4.
The
5.
March
little girl
feel
and
the
room
taste
loves her father mother brothers sisters
May
12.
are the three spring months

and they are small words
Where are you going my little friend
Sing your best song little bird before I go
Tell me boys where you have been
Wait for me uncle
Boys always speak the truth without fear
Have you seen Charles Samuel and Robert lately
13.
Girls have you learned
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
1 1
4.
Jones
He
Name
she
April
it hifjt
when
to use the question
mark
the nouns in the preceding thirteen sen-
tences, except the 6th.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
44
LESSON
XXIII
THE ADJECTIVE
Copy
1.
1.
2.
these sentences
The
The
What word
tree
was
apple
tells
tall.
sweet.
is
what kind of
tree
is
meant
What word
tells
the kind or quality of the apple?
A word
that tells the kind or quality of an object is called an
adjective.
The
2.
adjective often precedes the
Name
1
noun
as, a
sweet apple.
the adjectives in these sentences
Pretty girls and brave boys are found in
many coun-
tries.
3.
2.
large, tall,
green tree
standing in the beautiful
3.
4.
Fresh water
5.
Dear, patient, gentle Nell was gone.
is
eyes, red cheeks,
and curly
hair.
a pleasant drink.
Write eight sentences, using a different adjective
with each of these nouns
4.
is
meadow.
The baby has blue
snow
grass
sky
ball
paper
knife
wood
ice
Copy
nouns, the
following words,
the
common
tives in separate
placing the
proper
nouns, the verbs, and the adjec-
columns
pretty
garden
girl
weeps
cat
Tom
beautiful
hears
Carlo
sour
long
Springfield
soft
sweet
goes
hard
Rover
blue
chews
cow
PUNCTUATION
Write
5.
common
-^
45
sentence containing a proper noun, a
noun, an adjective, and a verb.
7 /
LESSON XXIV
PUNCTUATION
Copy these sentences, and
comma and the word a7id
1.
I.
2.
The path
"
notice the use of the

^
long, crooked path leads to the woods.
long and crooked,
is
Write sentences, placing two adjectives (using no
2.
adjective twice) * before each of these nouns

chair
peach
apple
stove
Write your sentences again, placing the adjectives
3.
after the nouns.
Write sentences, placing three adjectives before
4.
each of the nouns
5.
lions
bees
mountains
a ball
Write the sentences again, placing the adjectives
after the nouns.

*
When
the pupil
part of speech,
it is
is
required to select and use a
list
not expected that he will use the same
teachers will insist on
this,
vocabulary of their pupils.
of words of any
word
twice.
If
they will soon see a large increase in the
;;
; ;;
; ;
;:
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
6.
Combine each group
Gold
Gold
Gold
fish
A
A
bird
I
1
is
heavy.
is
yellow.
is
solid.
pig squeals.
duck quacks.
hen cackles,
sheep bleats.
U
i
swims.
flies.
A
A
^
frog jumps.
one
of statements into
5.
-!
The dog barks.

The cat mews.
book
is
on the
table.
bell is
on the
table.
^^^
^ ^^^
^^^^^-
''
LESS0N XXV
SKATING, AND RISING A BICYCLE
Write afeeut these tw sprts,
what each
telling fully
when
practiced, the pleasures f each, the bjectins
t each.
Close by telling which you prefer, and give
is,
the reasons fr yur choice.
LESSON XXVI
REVIEW
Use each
pair of these
through, threw
be, bee
hear, here
know, no
words
week, weak
in a
sentence
meat, meet
wood, would
deer, dear
son, sun
right, write
hour, our
flour, flower
buy, by
heal, heel
beat, beet.
REVIEW
2.
Here are two
one from each
list,
lists
and use them
first list
is
Select two words,
of nouns.
the word from the second

object in the
47
will
list
made
in a sentence so that
of
tell
thus,
what some
Flour
**
is
of wheat."
(I)
(2)
calico
wheati
a saw
cotton
linen
horn
shoes
wool
flour
leather!
flannel
flaxi
combs
flour'
bread
steel/
LESSON XX vn
REVIEW
1.
Write a declarative sentence about

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
things that are sour.

things that are sweet.
things that are hard.
things that are soft.
Write an interrogative sentence about

1
2.
3.
4.
3.
Three
Three
Three
Three
Use
Three things that are heavy.

Three things that are light.
Three things that are beautiful.

Three things that are dangerous.
three adjectives to describe
a boy
glass
a doll
snow
a cat
the horse
ice
the sea
made
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
48
Name
4.
the nouns, verbs, and adjectives in these
sentences
1.
2.
A fairy workman hides in every dimpled finger.

The wealthy merchant bought many nice present*
for
his daughter.
The tall elm bends.

The turbid torrent roared.
The vivid lightning flashes.
The brave leader fell.
The great Napoleon was conquered.
The victorious army of Alexander marched
long
distance.
LESSON XX vm
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE
Copy
1.
these sentences
burns.
1.
Fire
2.
The dog
3.
My
is
old cat
black.
ran into the house.
The first part

will see that each sentence has two parts.
what we are speaking about, and the second part tells what we
You
*.ells
say about the
The part
about
first part.
what we
are speaking
the subject, and the part that tells
what we say
of the
is called
about the subject

2.
Use each
sentence that tells
is called
the predicate.
of these
words
in a sentence,
and draw
a vertical line between the subject and the predicate

Chicago, town, marble, mountain.
:;
SUBJECT AND PREDICATE

3.
4.
5.
thus,
6.
Supply subjects for these predicates

I.
climbs mountains.
2.
is
will
come.
gray.
6.
was
here.
3.
are white.
7.
were here.
4.
are rough.
8.
has
Supply predicates for these subjects

1.
The
2.
An
3.
The
train
4.
man
old
5.
soldiers
6.
left.
Greenland and Iceland

George Washington
Asia and Africa
Supply two predicates for each of these subjects;
"The dog
bites
1.
Foxes
2.
Bears
3.
Teachers
and barks
"
4.
Kittens
5.
Apples
6.
Pupils
Supply three predicates for each

I
Washington
The
The
3.
A
A
4.
5.
of these subjects:
clerk
man
wise
.'^'^
studious pupil
good
watchful dog
Supply three subjects for each of these predicates
broke the windows.
2.
8.
5.
2.
7.
49
3.
received prizes.
4.
howl.
Use each
of these words in a sentence,
and draw
a vertical line between the subject and the predicate

ball,
bawl
bell, belle
bare, bear
flea, flee
knot, not
grown, groan
male, mail
hare, hair
ore, oar.
: ;
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
50
LESSON XXIX
THE SCHOOLROOM
1.
Write an essay on the schoolroom, using the
fol-
lowing outline
the size, the doors, the windows, the table, the desks, any
other furniture there
may be
in the
room, the appearance
of the walls, the appearance of the floor.

2.
pair of these words in one sentence
Use each
done, dun
hole,
one,
pale, pail
whole
won
tale, tail
LESSON XXX
THE OBJECT
1.
Are these sentences complete

1.
Henry
2.
The
3.
We
Some verbs
cat caught
wear
that express action require a
their meaning.
2.
struck
This word
is called
word
to
Write the words that are used as objects
sentences
1.
We
2.
Henry
3.
The
wear clothing.
struck Charles.
cat caught a
mouse.
complete
the object of the verb.

in these
THE OBJECT
5.
The
The
6.
Washington gained
7.
The Romans captured
4.
3.
saw me.
eagle
orator
Use each
made
of these
a speech.
verb
shall
hills,
chops, choo?
me, stockings, them, basket.
or
more objects;
as,
*'We
and valleys."
Write sentences
have two obj^-
Carthage.
cat,
may have two
saw mountains,
5.
victories.
words as the object of a verb
honey, copper, us, her,

4.
$1
in
ts
ts,
which each
of
these verbs
drink, sells, study, drives.
LESSON
REVIEW QUESTIONS
Name
With what should
the three different kinds of sentences.
What should be placed after a declarative

and an imperative sentence? What should be placed after an interHow many parts has a sentence? What is the
rogative sentence?
What is the predicate
subject?
every sentence begin?
THE SENTENCE
1.
Write the definition

a sentence
sentence
of
declarative
sentence
an imperative sentence
an interrogative
the subject
the
predicate.
2.
Combine your
definitions
nected essay on The Sentence,
so as
to
form a con-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
52
LESSON XXXII
THE VERB
1.
Examine
The
this
sentence:
field is large.
In this sentence the word

action.
It
A word that expresses

2.
word
as
1.
3.
it
does not express
action or being
is
a verb.
of
more
than one
Mary can read.

The train has gone.
The letter should have been
Name
written.
the verbs in these sentences
Leaves
fall
to the ground.
3.
know it.
Where is he?
4.
We
5.
The
2.
4.
a verb, but
Sometimes a verb consists

;
2.
3.
is is
simply asserts existence or being.
are reading about the lion.

colt
Use each
has been,
has been running through the meadow.
of these verbs in a sentence

is
running, should learn, can be seen, will choose,
shall be chosen.
5.
Write three sentences, each having a verb com-
posed of two words.

6.
Write three sentences, each having a verb com-
posed of three words.

7.
Try
to write a
verb composed of four words.
-<
crw ^^^^â.^
y^-otrr^
u?
REVIEW
53
LESSON XXXIII
REVIEW
Name
*
these
the subject, predicate, and object of each of
sentences, and
pick out the nouns, verbs, and
adjectives
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
8.
Animals and plants live and grow.

A band of robbers plundered the caravan.
Crusoe's companions were all drowned.
9.
The brave
6.
7.
10.
An
.
He sang the songs of his boyhood.

The fire burns cheerily.
You will lose your place.
The orator received great applause.
The lofty Andes rise above the clouds.
sailor
Did you see
managed
his boat skillfially.
that beautiful bird?
changed to a declarative beand object are picked out. This sentence
interrogative sentence should be
fore the subject, predicate,
y will become " You did see that beautiful bird."

"^
II.
12.
13.
Did he hear the song of the skylark?

The crowd cheered heartily.
The crowd cheered the speaker.
16.
Balboa discovered the Pacific Ocean.

Josephus wrote a history of the Jews.
The Swiss scenery is beautiful.
14.
15.
17.
The wind
18.
Palm
19.
Lakes are supplied with water by
never weary.
is
trees
grow
in Asia, Africa,
and South America.

rivers,
brooks, or
springs.
20.
Eagles do not catch
21.
22.
The meadow^
good
girl
23.
Mabel has a
24.
The
flies.
wrote a long
is
letter.
covered with grass and flowers.
beautifiil pet squirrel.
vessel struck a hidden rock.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
54
LESSON XXXIV
THE PRONOUN
Examine
1.
In the
Who
1.
John
2.
go
first
studies
these sentences
learns because he studies.

to school.
sentence,
is
is
name
of anything
used instead oijohi
he the
What word
who goes
The word / is used instead
of the name of the speaker.)
In the second sentence,
noun
instead
The words / and
A word
2.
of what
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fill
is
used
is
a pronoun.
:
lessons.
my friends.
my friend.
are
is
went
3.
6.
word / a
(It
each of these blanks with a pronoun
5.
She scolded him.

Can you see us ?
Here is the boy who was hurt.
He is the man whom you saw.
2.
4.
a noun
it
Is the
word
in these sentences
They are good boys.

Henry has his book.
The children study their
1.
Is
he are pronoims.
Copy the pronouns
to school
used for or instead of a noun
2.
3.
The
The
to
teacher told
have lost
must go with
pupils
to go.
books.
and
Write three declarative, three interrogative, and

three imperative sentences, using a different pronoun
4.
in
each sentence.
THE ADVERB
55
LESSON XXXV
THE ADVERB
Copy these sentences
1.
1.
2.
What word
pitcher
He writes well.
The pitcher is here.
tells
how he
writes
What word
tells
where the
is ?
Well and here are adverbs, modifying the verbs writes and
3.
4.
The apple
You came
What part of
What does soon
word
tells
is
very sweet.
too soon.
speech
tell ?
how soon
is.
is
sweet
What
What word
part
of
speech
tells
is
how sweet
soofi ?
What
In these sentences very and too are adverbs.
word used
to
modify a verb, an adjective, or an adverb,
adverb.
2.
Write a sentence with each of these adverbs

early
is
an
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
56
6.
Copy
Adjectives
Adverbs
quick,
quickly;
bright,
bold,
boldly;
bad,
badly;
nice,
nicely
sweet,
sweetly
rapid,
rapidly;
careless,
carelessly.
How
7.
these adjectives and adverbs
Adverbs
Adjectives
are the adverbs in the above
list
brightly;
made
Write a sentence containing two adjectives and
two adverbs.
LESSON XXX vr
REVIEW
Name
jectives,
si;^ct, predicate, and object of these
the
Pick out the nouns, pronouns, verbs, ad-
sentences.
and adverbs
6.
Frank and I were laughing heartily.

She and I sat at the window.
The task was soon accomplished.
A man is easily known by the company he keeps.
Pronounce your words distinctly and correctly.
The men worked hard and fast, and the rocks were soon
f.
How
long did you remain in the city
%.
The
traveler walked slowly because
9.
This topic
V.
s.
jg.
4.
j.
removed.
i*-^ I
18.
We
14.
be
fully
discussed
later.
ate dinner hurriedly yesterday.
w.
If.
will
he was very
winter so cold has never been
The
The
all
laughed very heartily.
birds chirp merrily.
boat glides very gracefully.
known
before.
tired.
THE PHRASE
{x.*.vt
^7
57
A^-^
n
?
LESSON XXX vn
THE PHRASE
Examine these groups
I.
1.
Ripe apples.
2.
In the house.
of words
'
3.
4.
Under the
truthful child.
Are the above words properly put together

express a complete thought
group of words properly combined but not expressing a
thought
is
a phrase.
All the examples given above
do not
i.
tree.
Does each group
.?
call
the
first
and the
are phrases,
third phrases in
Copy the following groups
but
many
authors
grammar.
of words.
Write the
sentences in one column, the phrases in another, and
those which are neither sentences
nor phrases in a
third
|.
1.
Fell heavily.
7.
There was a heavy
2.
Covered with snow.
8.
To
9.
10.
Speak the truth.

The ground was covered with
snow.
11.
Grass
3.
The
4.
City to the.
5.
Over the barn.

Careful thinking.
The
2.
Axes are made
4.
5.
tall.
phrases to these sentences
I.
3.
4.
is tall.
6.
Add
.
grass
rain.
the city.
birds fly
The house stands

The largest city
The lambs play
Write
five sentences,
is
each containing a phrase.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
58
LESSON XXX VIIT

REVIEW
1.
tive,
Add
to
each of these sentences
one adverb, and one phrase

1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
ID.
2.
at least
Boys study.
Waves dashed.
The soldiers wore uniforms.
The speaker was applauded.
Houses are built.
Books should be
read.
The sun is shining.

Snow falls.
The visitors will be
The deer fled.
here.
Enlarge these sentences by adding several modieach.
fiers to
proach of cold
Example: "Birds
viêather,
many
liy."
birds
south in search of a vârmer climate."

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The horse drinks.

The boy was punished.
The whole earth smiles.
That dog growls.
Those books have been read.
Locomotives whistle.
7.
The
8.
Columbus discovered America.
9.
Stars shine.
boat glides.
10.
Lions roar.
11.
The tree was struck.

The boy wrote a letter.
The rain fell.
The wind blew.
one adjec
13.
14.
"At
fly
the
ap-
toward the
THE PREPOSITION
59
LESSON XXXIX
THE PREPOSITION
1.
Copy
these sentences
2.
3.
The
The
The
cat
is
in the house.
cat
is
cat
is
on the house.
under the house.
In these sentei ces the words
/;/, 07t^
of the cat in rela.ion to the house.

before,
beside,
or behind,
before, etc., are relation
and under ?,\\ovj the
situation
We
the house.
might say the cat is by

The words in, under, on,
words, ox prepositions.
2.
Write
3.
Write a sentence containing the preposition

at,
six sentences,
each containing a preposition.

:
through, across, toward, upon, during, by, over, among,
between.
You
a preposition is nearly always followed by a

noun or pronoun. The noun or pronoun is called the object of the
preposition, and may be modified by one or more adjectives
as,
" He went to a good school."
Here school is the object of the preposition to, and has two modifiers, a and good.
will notice that
4.
shall
Write sentences
them
pond
5.
in
which each of these words
be used as the object of a preposition
Name
keg
neighbor
him
coachman
her
piano
ice
it
the prepositions in these sentences
2.
The stranger came from a large city.

The farmer came to town with a load
3.
It
4.
1.
was early
in the
morning.
place of safety was found for him.
of corn.
; ; ;
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
60
LESSON XL
THE CONJUNCTION
1.
Examine these sentences.

Mary and Lucy
1.
What word
connects
read.
Mary and Lncy ?
Mary reads and Lucy
2.
writes.
How many
thoughts or assertions in this sentence?
What word
connects the assertions?
Mary
3.
What word
2.
Name
studies
and Lucy
recites.
connects the two thoughts?
the connecting words in these sentences
1.
Mary
2.
Walter writes well but slowly.
learns because she studies.
3.
She or
4.
The
will
go.
laborer worked, although he was sick.
Connecting words are called conjunctions.

3.
Fill these
2.
He
He
3.
1.
go
works hard
send anybody.
he
is
old.
go
you will.
The merchant became rich
4.
will
4.
Write
5.
Use each
tence.
blanks with conjunctions
will neither
five sentences,
Name
he was careful.
each having a conjunction.
pair of the following
the conjunctions in
words
in
a sen-
the sentences you
write
all,
awl
reed, read
toe,
tow
bow, beau
flew, flue
sole, soul
steel, steal
weigh,
way
seem, seam.
THE INTERJECTION
6l
itaxSi
LESSON XLI
THE INTERJECTION
1.
Examine these sentences:

1.
Hurrah!
2.
Ah What
!
It
Alas!
O, look at the sun!
What words
^*^
cannot go.
3.
4.
>
snows.
a disaster that was.
in these sentences are
used to express feeling or
emotion?
word used
to express strong feeling or
emotion
is called
an interjection.
Notice the punctuation in the above sentences.

2.
An
exclamation
point
(!)
should be used after
every interjection, except O.

3.
Write
five sentences,
each containing an interjec-
tion.
4.
tion
5.
Write three sentences, each containing a preposi-
and a conjunction.
Try
to write a sentence containing a
noun, a pro-
noun, an adjective, a verb, an adverb, a preposition, and

a conjunction.
6.
Write sentences
of the
7.
illustrating
two rules for the use
comma.
Write sentences illustrating three rules for the use
of the period.
8.
Write sentences
of capital^,
illustrating three rules for the use
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
62
LESSON XLII
QUOTATIONS
Copy
1.
Who
third
these sentences
The man
2.
"
3.
"
Come, Fannie," said
wish
said,
'-'
had a
said part of the
You must not

kite/' said
first
Julia,
sentence
take
my
apples."
Clarence Reed.
'
and go with me."
Of the second
Of
the
Words and
sentences
borrowed from
another
are
called
quotations
2.
In the quotations just used, observe

1.
The marks
2.
That
that inclose the quotations.
in the third sentence the quotation
is
broken
in
two, and the quotation marks inclose each part.

3.
4.
That the quotation is separated from the rest of the

sentence by a comma.
That when a quotation expresses a complete thought, it
should begin with a capital.*
3.
Copy
these sentences, and place quotation marks
where necessary
1.
Watch my
horse,
and
Pll give
you a dime, said the
soldier.
2.
The
3.
4.
4.
Write
* It is not
place.
cat said, I'll catch you, little mouse.

know, said Charles, what you want.
The boy said, Come here, Towser.
five sentences,
using quotations.
thought best to speak of direct or indirect quotations in this

J
REVIEW
5.
63
Imagine two boys, Ralph and Arthur, talking
about the Fourth of July.
Write what they might say to
each other, using quotation marks where necessary.
LESSON
XLIII
REVIEW
Point
the
out
nouns,
adverbs, prepositions,
tences.
Name
pronouns,
verbs,
and conjunctions
adjectives,
these
in
sen-
whether the nouns are proper or common.
Tell
the subject, predicate, and object.
2.
Roses delight us with their color and fragrance.

The music of the organ resembles the roar of the
3.
Charles Dickens was buried in Westminster Abbey.
1.
thunder.
4.
Swallows sometimes build their nests
5.
Dates grow on palm
6.
Ciiesar
7.
8.
People often make mistakes.
\ 9.
10.
^
J<.
12.
gained very
large basket
The
He
many
filled
victories.
with ripe peaches.
an exceedingly
careful
workman.
The careless boy lost his coat and his cap.

The wind and the rain delayed our journey.
Sooner or
14.
15.
The weary
17.
chimneys.
inhabitants of Switzerland are very industrious.
is
13.
16.
was
in
trees.
later
we must pass away.
>
never before saw a more beautiful sight.

father gently kissed his sick child.
A terrible storm passed over the city.

A man of good habits generally has health.
18.
Silvery clouds fringed the horizon.
19.
.'
beautiful lake lay in front of the iguse.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
64
LESSON XLIV
THE COW
1.
about
Write one or more sentences
something
3.
The size.
The color.
The covering
4.
How they
1.
2.
2.
telling
5.
The
6.
Their use.
of the body.
defend themselves.
different kinds.
Arrange and combine
all
your sentences so that
they will form a story or essay about the cow.
LESSON XL V
REVIEW
I,
Name
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
the nouns, pronouns,
etc.,
as in Lesson 43
Some very large diamonds were bought.

The birds and flowers have now appeared again.
Bad habits are seldom overcome.
Good mei> are very frequently abused by bad men.
Some mountains are high and grand.
Every man should carefully think for himself.
We saw many beautiful works of art.
DIAGRAMS
2.
Insert
commas,
capitals,
necessary, in these sentences

I.
6S
and quotation marks, when

:
Longfellow says learn to labor and to wait.

He also says art is long and time is fleeting.
Hard work
Night
The
is
said he
is
the key to success.
the time for rest says the poet.
child
is
father of the
man
How many are you then said I

'Tis only noble to
He
writes
if
be good says Tennyson.
said to the wild sea be
still.
LESSON XL VI
DIAGRAMING
I.
2.
farmer
Wordsworth.
they two are in heaven
plants
66
5-
ESSAY
5.
Man
6.
Pupils should always obey cheerfully.
7.
Quite long lessons are sometimes given.
8.
The
9.
An
10.
suffers for every
birds have
education
is
wrong deed.
come back
large tree stands
CITY OR
Write an essay,
rather early.
not acquired in a short time.
on the top of the
LE^SSQN ^L
live in
67
telling
hill.
VIII
COUNTRY
whether you would rather
the city or in the country, and give reasons for
your choice.
tuation.
Be
careful about your spelling
and punc-
PART TWO
LESSON
/j
CLASSES OF NOUNS
1.
city,
2.
Noun
man,
is
anything;
of
as,
London,
hope.
Proper
Noun
son, place, or thing

3.
name
the
A Common
name
the
is
Noun
a general name, and can be
is
applied to any one of a class
Some nouns
of a particular per-
London, Towser.
as, Charles,
as, boy, city, dog.
names of groups of persons
are the
or things
as.
audience, fleet.
Such nouns are

4.
Collective
of objects;
2,^,
Some nouns
or things
cold,
and
as,
are applied
An
these
name
applied to a group
qualities or conditions of persons
to
cold,
We
heigJit.
reference
to
can think of wisdojn,

any particular person or
or conditions.
qualities
Such nouns are
Noims.
Abstract
of a substance
Collective
is
swarm, compa7iy.
height without
called Abstract
5.
Noun
flock,
wisdom,
thing as having
Nouns.
called Collective
Noun
is
the
name
of a quality, not
* as, beauty, virtue, wJiiteîess.
and abstract nouns are common nouns.

*
A ?ubst^nce
is
anything that has weight.
68
CAPITALS AND PUNCTUATION
Name
6.
69
the subject, predicate, and object of these
Copy
common, the
the
nouns, placing the proper,
sentences.
all
the
collective,
and the abstract nouns
in
separate groups.
The
they
collective
will
and the abstract nouns will be written twice

common nouns and also in groups
be written with the
of their own.
The
The
1.
2.
Legislature adjourned at ten o^clock.

Mississippi
river
has a length of four thousand
miles.
4.
The lowing herd winds slowly o'er the lea.

Honor and shame from no condition rise.
5.
Who
3.
wrote Paradise Lost f
Time had worn deep furrows in his face.

The lilac bears long clusters of flowers.
6.
7.
8.
9.
The bravery
gang of thieves was captured by the police.

of the soldier was remarkable.
Diagram the sentences
7.
in
LESSON
paragraph
6.
II
A capital letter should be used
I.
Ji^ For the
N^^
3.
A<;^1
4.
^l
5.
'^<4>'
p^^
^""^
7;
)^
\
,
i^
first letter
of every sentence.
For the first letter of every proper noun.

For the first letter of every line of poetry.
For the first letter of every direct quotation.
For initials that represent proper nouns.
For the words / and O.
For the first letter of all names applied to the Deity.
For the first letter of the days of the week and the
months of the year
but the names of the seasons
;
should not begin with a capital.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
70
2.
letter or letters are often
which they are a part
3.
as,
Gen. for General, dos, for
These shortened forms are
dozen.
At the close of each
called Abbreviations.
period should be used

1.
used for a word of
declarative
and imperative sen-
tence.
4.
2.
After each
3.
After every abbreviation.
A comma
1.
To
initial.
should be used
separate the
name
of the person addressed from
the remainder of the sentence.

If the
name
is
not at the beginning or end of the sentence,
two commas must be used.

2.
To
separate the words of a series.
The word and is seldom used except between the last two of
but if and is used between every two, no comma should
The farmer raises wheat, corn, and oats.
be used. Examples
The farmer raises wheat and corn and oats.
a
series,
5.
The
interrogation
point
should be used at the
close of every interrogative sentence.

6.
Write a sentence containing a noun that
name of
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
A class of animals.
A class of trees.
A class of buildings.
A class of flowers.
A special animal.
A special building.
A special book.
A class of books.
/
is
the
GENDER
71
Write a sentence containing a noun that names a

collection of ^^ri[\
7.
8.
-^'^^'^V^^^
1.
Bees.
2.
Soldiers. -loa^^r-^-^S--^
3.
Sailors.
4.
Buffaloes.
Write
5.
Fish.
6.
Wolves.
7-
Chickens.
8.
Thieves.
'\JkX'^
^^ -O
-'
>.
sentence containing an abstract noun
meaning nearly the same
as
I.
Beautiful.
6.
Strong.
2.
Cheerful.
7-
High.
3.
Sweet.
8.
o-
Wide.
vvme.
4-
Proud.
9.
Hard.
5.
J.
Deceive.
lo-
Wise.
//VlAAiL
u^^
%,
LESSON
^
III
y;
GENDER
Several parts of speech are subject to changes in form and

meaning; as, boy, boy's; girl, girls; large, larger; read, reads.
Such changes of form or meaning are called Pr(jêrties or Modi\
fications.
1.
Gender
'.
is
a distinction of nouns and pronouns in
regard to sex.
2.
Nouns and pronouns
Masculine Gender ;
3.
that refer to males are of the
as, father, he,
Nouns and pronouns
the Feminine Gender ;
Henry,
ki?ig.
that refer to females are of
as, sister, she,
Mary,
qtieejt.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
72
Nouns and pronouns
4.
that refer to objects neither
male nor female are of the Neuter Gender ;
as, tree^ city^
it, JioiLse.
Nouns and pronouns
5.
or females, or both, are of
refer to either males
that
Commoji Gender ;
the
as,
parent, bird, they, children.
Notice these nouns
6.
brother,
You
yy.
wîll
sister
lion,
lioness
notice that the gender
The gender
of
nouns
is
is
manservant,
shown
maidservant.
in different v^fays.
shown
in three
ways
by
using different words, by using different endings, and
by placing different words before a noun
mon
8.
of the
com-
gender.
Copy
these masculine nouns, and opposite each
write the corresponding feminine form

bachelor
boy
husband
uncle
emperor
PERSON
11.
Write two sentences having feminine subjects
and neuter
12.
73
objects.
Write two sentences having nouns of the com-
mon gender
for subjects.
The tendency of modern writers is to omit the feminine ending

many words to which it was formerly attached. This tendency
from
should be encouraged, for we have no need of such words as author-
and
ess^ editress.,
itistructress.
LESSON IV
PERSON
1.
Examine these sentences

2-
John, am sixteen years old.

Henry, you are sixteen years old.
3.
William says he
I.
You
will
I.
is
sixteen years old.
observe that / 3.\idJohn in the
Henry and you
first
sentence refer to the
second sentence refer to the

person spoken to, and that VVilliajn and he in the third sentence
This change in the use of nouns and
refer to the person spoken of.
speaker, that
pronouns
2.
is
in the
called Person.
Person
is
that property of
a noun or
which denotes the speaker, the person spoken

person spoken
3.
Pauly
The
or the
of.
First Person denotes the
am an
pronoun
to,
apostle."
^"^
speaker
as,
"
/,
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
74
The Second Person denotes the person spoken to

''Mr. President, I second that
''Jajnes, come here."
4.
as,
motion."
5.
The Third Person denotes
spoken of
**
as,
Ccesar
person or thing
the
was a general!'
''
heard the
thunder roar."
6.
Name
pronouns
in these sentences
am
glad to see you.
1.
Friends,
2.
3.
Are these trees old ?

Are you here too, Brutus
4.
The
5.
the gender and person of the nouns and
6.
citizens believe that they are not in the
Queen Victoria was Queen of England.

When Lucy had solved the problem, she
wrong.
said,
"
have
it."
7.
Write a sentence having for

1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
%.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9.
its
object
A noun, masculine, third person.

A pronoun, second person.
A pronoun, first person.
A noun, feminine, third person.
A pronoun, neuter, third person.
Use each
fir,
subject
A proper noun, masculine, third person.

A pronoun, masculine, second person.
A pronoun, feminine, second person.
A pronoun, neuter, third person.
A pronoun, masculine, first person.
A common noun, feminine, third person.
A common noun, common gender, third person.

1.
its
fur
of these
hose, hoes
rode, road, rowed.
words
;
in
sentences
pray, prey
in,
inn
peace, piece
NUMBER
75
LESSON V
NUMBER
Examine these nouns and pronouns
1.
book, books
You
more than one.

2.
This change
Number
by which
box, boxes
I,
we
observe that some of them
will
is
in
he, they.
mean
meaning
is
some mean
one, and
called Nutnber.
that modification of a
noun or pronoun
denotes one or more than one.
it
3.
The Singular Ntimber dQnotQs but
4.
The Plural Number denotes more than
5.
Most nouns form the plural by adding
singular
6.
as, tree^ trees
bench, benches
fox, foxes
you add
pronounce them without making an additional
of such nouns is formed by adding es.
s to these singular
If
Nouns ending
by adding
8.
in
9.
the
dish, dishes.
s, ^,
x,
s/i,
and
syllable.
c/i
The
plural
form the plural
es.
boy, boys
plural
s to
nouns, you will find that you cannot
Examine these singular and
What
What
one.
eagle^ eagles.
Notice these singular and plural nouns

dress, dresses
7.
one.
plural nouns
lady, ladies.
letter
precedes
letter
precedes
Nouns ending
by adding
s.
/ in 6oy ? Is it a vowel or a consonant

/ in lady ? Is it a vowel or a consonant
in
y preceded by
Nouns ending
a vowel
in
?
?
form the
preceded by
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
'je
a consonant form the plural by changing
adding
10.
to i
Most nouns ending in/ and /^ form the
by adding
add
and
es.
s.
The
following change
/ and fe
to
plural
v and
es.
beef, calf, half, knife, leaf,
11.
life,
shelf, self, thief, wife, wolf.
Write the plural of each of the following nouns,
and give the

latch
rule.
NUMBER
4.
Change the nouns
yy
of these sentences
from the
sin-
gular to the plural, and write the sentences correctly
4.
The alley is narrow.

The branch is long.
The army has marched a long distance.
The monkey is a cunning animal.
5.
1.
2.
3.
on the plate.
pony is black and my ox is brown.
The thief stole a muff and a calf.
7.
5.

This man
1.
4.
6.
7.
is
and
TJiis
and
tJiat
and
are used with singular nouns,
those with plural nouns.
Use
these instead of this,
and rewrite these sentences
and
those instead of that,
1.
This lady has a bonnet.
2.
3.
That ox is
That tooth
4.
This knife has two blades.
large.
is
decayed.
Was this penny made in 1894?

That wild goose is going south.
5.
6.
8.
old.
That boy is skating.

These men are old.
Those boys are skating.
2.
3.
these
fly is
My
6.
Fill these
blanks with
this, that, these,
and
those,
and write the sentences correctly
in turn,
do not
like
kind of apples.
sort of berries
2.
The
3.
is
not sweet.
teacher likes to have
kind of boys in his
school.
^)Ûse
each of these words in a sentence having a
singular subject
fair, fare
seller, cellar
read; sees, seas, seize.
sent, cent, scent
gate, gait
red,
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
78
10.
Use each
of these
words
in a sentence
having a
plural subject
lye
lie,
tax, tacks
pare, pair, pear
sell, cell
ware, wear
two, too.
to,
LESSON
VII
REVIEW
1.
2.
3.
Write the plural of each of these words:

body
gallery
copy
dairy
lily
kidney
journey
donkey
pulley
poppy
child
truth
gulf
valley
chimney
trout
Write the singular of these nouns
oxen
mice
wages
salmon
series
measles
mumps
shears
feet
swine
juries
thanks
Change the nouns
of these sentences
from the
singular to the plural, and rewrite the sentences
4.
noun
1.
The
2.
My
lady sang a song.
3.
pony has white feet.

The leaf of the palm tree
4.
One
5.
large
2.
The
The
3.
My
4.
I,
6.
large.
salmon was caught in the
river.
the gender, person, and
in these
5.
is
family lives in that old house.
Name
1.
sentences
topaz
is
John, saw
5.
of eacli
a beautiful gem.
traveler delighted us
friends,
number
why do you
all
by singing a
return so soon
solo.
?
these things.
The deer were admiring themselves in the brook.

The farmer was breaking prairie with three yoke
oxen.
7.
Mr. President,
rise to
ask a question.
in
paragraph
3.
of
NOMINATIVE AND OBJECTIVE CASE
LESSON
79
VIII
THE NOMINATIVE AND THE OBJECTIVE CASE

1.
3.
The man is sick.

know the man.
The book belongs
4.
1.
2.
You
will
have the man's
to the
man.
hat.
observe that a noun (or a pronoun)
ent offices in a sentence.
may have
may be the subject, it may be the
it may denote possession.
These
It
of a verb or preposition, or
differ-
object
differ-
ent offices of nouns and pronouns are called Cases.

2.
tence
3.
noun
or
is
in the
Nominative Case.
noun or pronoun used as the object
or preposition
4.
is
pronoun used as the subject
2.
3.
of a verb
in the Objective Case.
Give the case of

1.
of a sen-
all
the nouns in these sentences
The dog caught the pet kitten.

Burgoyne surrendered at Saratoga.
The Second Continental Congress convened
at Phila-
delphia.
7.
The temple of Jupiter was in Rome.

The dog ran under the house.
Can the deer run ?
Have the men returned from the city
8.
Education gives power.
4.
5.
6.
9.
10.
5.
Necessity never
No man
made a good
bargain.
can hide his shame from heaven.
Write two sentences, each having a noun in the
objective case, object of a verb, and a

jective case, object of a preposition.
noun
in the ob-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
80
Examine
6.
this
sentence
Milton was a poet.
Does it mean the same person as

Does the verb was express action?
Can poet be the
object of was /
Ispoe^part of the predicate?
Milton?
When a noun
7.
forms part of the predicate and de-
notes the same person or thing as the subject,
it is
called
a Predicate Noun, or Predicate Nominative^ and
is in
the same case as the subject.
The
The
predicate nominative
a pronoun as, '^ I am he."

sometimes called Attribute Com-
may be
predicate nominative
is
plement.
8.
Name
tences
the predicate noun in each of these sen-
1.
Caesar was the conqueror of Gaul.
2.
Harvey was the discoverer of the
circulation
of the
blood.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Grant was the leader of the army.

Defoe was the author of " Robinson Crusoe."
They had been friends in youth.
Washington has been called the Father of his Country.
LESSON IX
THE POSSESSIVE CASE

1.
A noun
or pronoun used to denote possession
is in
the Possessive Case.

2.
In these sentences examine the nouns that are in
the possessive case

1.
2.
3.
4.
The
The
The
The
boy's hat
is
torn
boys' hats are torn.

child's
books are new.
children's books are new.
THE POSSESSIVE CASE

3.
Si
Singular nouns, and plural nouns not ending in
s,
and
s.
form the possessive by adding the apostrophe

Plural nouns ending in s form the possessive
(')
by adding
the apostrophe only.
When
you wish to write the possessive plural of a noun, write the

then examine it before you decide whether to add the
apostrophe only or the apostrophe and s.
plural
4.
first,
Write the possessive singular, the
possessive plural of these
5.
child, dog, lady,
boys'
woman, box,
Change these expressions
sessive case; thus
The
to the
hat of the lady
and the
Pos. Plural
boys
boy's
man,
Plural
Pos. Sing.
bird,
nouns
plural,
thus
The lady's
hat.
horse.
form of the pos-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
82
LESSON X
REVIEW
I.
Name
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
the case of each noun in these sentences
The teacher and pupils heard the girl's song.

December's cold and dreary days are here.
Caesar conquered Gaul.
Harvey discovered the circulation of the blood.
Grant led the army.
Defoe wrote " Robinson Crusoe."
The Romans conquered the civilized world.
The grim sexton now made a gesture with his
The waves rush in on every hand.
r^ Grandfather's
chair stood
by the
staff.
fireside.
11.
The
12.
Franklin invented the lightning rod.
laws of nature are the thoughts of God.
13.
Fulton was the inventor of the steamboat.
14.
The
people of Denmark, Norway, and
Sweden
are called
Scandinavians.
15.
16.
"^.Ûse
Roger Williams was the founder of Rhode Island.

Lee surrendered his army to Grant.
each
First, in the
of
nominative case, predicate

object of a verb
a preposition
nouns
these
in
six
sentences:
nominative case, subject; second, in the
third, in the
objective case,
fourth, in the objective case, object of
fifth, in
the possessive singular
sixth, in
the possessive plural.

squirrel,
3.
We
now
coward, pony.
see that the modifications of nouns are
gender, person, number, and case.
DIAGRAMS
83
LESSON XI
DIAGRAMS
I.
Notice this diagram
My
brother's friend
is
an author.
friend
is
[
author.
brother's
My
EXPLANATION
noun or pronoun in the possessive case is placed as a modifier

of the word denoting the thing possessed.
A noun or pronoun in the predicate is separated from the verb
by two dashes.
Diagram the sentences in paragraphs 4 and

Lesson 8; and paragraph i, Lesson 10.
2.
LESSON
8,
XII
REVIEW
""y^
Mention two or more nouns that denote smaller

by each of these nouns
thus: books
readers, grammars; flowers
roses, lilies.
1.
classes of the objects denoted
books
mechanic
building
grass
flower
mineral
insect
quadruped
fruit
vegetable
bird
tree
2.
Name
the gender, person, number, and case of
each noun in these sentences

1.
On
Christmas,
Robert received a beautiful
present
from his uncle.

2.
The Esquimaux endure
severe cold in winter.
..
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
84
3.
friend's horse
was
killed
by hard work.
men sometimes make
5.
6.
Spring's pleasant days are here.
7.
wisest
eagle can carry a lamb in
The hero
The visit
10.
1 1
The eye
9.
its
mistakes.
talons.
of the story should be a brave man.
was a
Temperance is a virtue.
Tadpoles become frogs.
8.
3.
My
The
The
4.
to the park
is
delightful event.
the organ of sight.
-îagram the preceding sentences.
LESSON
XIII
CLASSES OF PHRASES
1.
modifier
1.
2.
The
The
may be
a phrase
as
strength of the lion is great.

President lives
Washijigton.
You
in
will notice that of the lion modifies the noun strength, and
Washington modifies the verb lives.
2.
phrase modifying a noun or pronoun
is
an
Adjective Phrase^ and a phrase modifying a verb, an

adjective, or
3.
Copy
an adverb,
is
an Adverb Phrase.
the phrases in these sentences.
adjective phrases in one coUimn,
Place the
and the adverb phrases
in another
1
2.
The sun sets in the west.

The house on the hill is large.
3.
Hannibal was a general of great renown.
4.
The train of emigrants went slowly over

The university stands on a hill.
The water of the ocean is salt.
5.
6.
the prairie.
PARSING
7.
number
large
train of
The
8.
85
of bushels of wheat was carried on a
twenty
cars.
city of Philadelphia
is
on the Delaware River.
4.
Write three sentences containing adjective phrases.
5.
Write three sentences containing adverb phrases.
LESSON XIV
PARSING
Parsing a word
1.
tions,
and
The
2.
noun,
its
syntax
is
which
it
of speech, the
belongs, all
its
modifica-
relations to other words.*
following
class,
naming the part
is
class or subdivision to
the order for parsing nouns
is
gender, person, number, case, syntax.
meant the
office of the
noun
(By
in the sentence.)
EXAMPLES
Columbus was a sailor, and had three ships in his fleet.
Columbus is a noun, proper masculine gender, third person, singular number, nominative case, subject of the verbs was and had.
;
Sailor
is
common
a noun,
masculine gender, third person, sin-
gular number, nominative case, in predicate with the verb was.
Ships
is
Fleet
is
son, singular
may
At
neuter gender, third person, plural
case, object of the verb had.
a noun,
number, objective
Remark.
common
a noun,
number, objective
common
neuter gender, third person, singular
case, object of the preposition
number,"
i7i.
pupils should say, "masculine gender, third per-
first
etc.,
but after they are familiar with the order they
say " masculine, third, singular," etc.
* It is essential, in
order,
and
to follow the
good parsing, to have a regular and systematic

same order all the time.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
86
3.
noun:
The following
is
a model for written parsing of the
THE NOUN
8;
LESSON XV
THE NOUN
Write an essay on the noun,
its
and properties, and giving
classes
you can about
telling all
at least
one exam-
ple after each definition.
LESSON XVI
CLASSES F PRONOUNS
<
1.
2.
The
which
Pr^nsun
ward used instead
Antecedent f
prnun
fr^nouns, as
/,
ymi^ and he, shw
they stand far the speaker, the person
They
spoken ^.
3.
son by
4.
of a nûn.
the
is
wrd
fr
stands.
it
Sme
is
its
t,
whether
r the person
are called Personal Pratimins.
Personal Pronoun
The
their i%xm.
liy
spoken
is
one that indicates
its
per-
form.
following are the personal pronouns:

SINGULAR
Nominative
thou
Possessive
my
thy
OBjECxrvE
me
thee
Nominative
PLURAL
we
you
your
you
ye,
you
he
she
his
her
its
him
her
it
it
they
Possessive
our
your
their
Objective
us
you
them
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
88
The possessive forms given above are used with nouns, but the
forms mitie, thine, hers, ours, yours, and theirs are used v^^hen no
noun follows the possessive
That
That
is
my
is
mine.
as
pencil.
The nominative forms should
not be used as the object, nor the
objective forms as the subject or predicate nominative.

5.
Sometimes
self or selves
They
pronouns.
added
is
to the personal
then called Compoimd Personal
are
Pr07lOH7lS.
The Compound Personal Pronouns

hersef and itsef,
yourselves, and the?nselves.
hijnself
6.
are myself, thyself,
in the singular,
yoursef
plurals ourselves,

1. Who has my book ?
2.
Which
3.
What
is
right
have you
what stand
In these sentences who, which, and
represent the answers to the questions
nouns.
and the
They
are used to ask questions
names
for the
that
therefore, they are protherefore, they are called
Interrogative Pro7iou7is.
7.
An
Interrogative Pronoun
one used
is
in
asking
questions.
The
interrogative pronouns are who, which,
who and
the possessive form of
and what.
whom
which, and
is
Whose
is
the objective
form oiwho.
8.

1.
Some (men)
2.
Each
3.
This book
are rich.
(pupil)
In these sentences,
is
if
must study
we use
the words some,
them.
each.,
is
mine.
the words in parentheses, the words
some, each, and that are adjectives.

ses,
for himself.
yours, that (book)
If
we omit
and that take
the words in parenthe-
their place, or stand for
Therefore, they are called Adjective Frojiouns.
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
An
9.
Point out
10.
tell
adjective
whether they are personal, interrogative, or

:
1.
Who
Many do
3.
Who
5.
6.
the pronouns in these sentences,
all
2.
4.
one that performs the
is
an adjective and a noun.
offices of
and
Adjective Pronoun
89
defeated Napoleon?
is
not obtain their wishes.
he ?
heard her request.
These are white, but those are black.

I saw them when they did it.
Write two sentences, each containing
11.
1.
2.
3.
4.
A
A
personal pronoun.
compound personal pronoun.
An
An
interrogative pronoun.
adjective pronoun.
^^
LESSON XVII
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
Many
T.
as
you
sentences contain more than one statement,
will see
1.
by examining the following
The owner
New
of the house,
2.
This animal, which
3.
The book
In these
who
is
a rich man,
sentences
is
a lion, was captured in Africa.
that lies on the table
is
a reader.
the words luho, which, and that are
instead of the nouns owner, animal, and book
pronouns.
which
is
lives in
York.
The antecedent
of
who
is
used
therefore they are
owner, the antecedent of
animal, and the antecedent of that
is
book.
V.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
90
You ^will observe that each of these pronouns

connecting the two statements in each sentence.
are called Relative Pronouns.
2.
used
3.
The pronouns
which, and
a connective,
Such pronouns
that,
when
not
asking questions, are Relative Pronouns.
in
Name
the relative pronouns in these sentences
7.
I know the man who built this boat.

The figs which we ate came in a neat box.
The storm that came so suddenly did much damage.
The evil that men do lives after them.
None knew the sorrow that she felt.
The eye, which sees all other things, cannot see itself.
He who cannot read needs a teacher.
8.
He
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.
ivho,
is
that has bad luck usually gets bad treatment.
Write three sentences, each containing a relative
pronoun.
"Y'-Name
tell
all the pronouns in these sentences, and

whether they are personal, interrogative, adjective,
or relative
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
built the first
house in
this city?
These books are large, those are small.

The little girl went with her mother.
Boys often injure themselves while they are playing.
The boy who threw the stone has not been caught.
6.
What
7.
That
8.
He
did he say?
is
the
same
will fulfill his
10.
We respect those
We ourselves are
11.
This
9.
6.
Who
is
story that you read yesterday.
promise.
v^^ho
respect themselves.
to blame.
wrong.
Since pronouns
take
the
place of nouns, they
have the same modifications as nouns.
FORMS OF PRONOUNS
LESSON
91
XVIII
CORRECT FORMS OF PRONOUNS

1.
1.
John learns because he
2.
The lady supported herself hy

All men must do their duty.
3.
You will
studies.
sewing.
notice that he agrees with /<?//;/ (its antecedent) in gender,
person, and number; that herself 2.gYets with lady, and their agrees
You
with men.
will also notice that these
pronouns do not
all
have
the same case as their antecedents.

2.
pronoun must have the same gender, person,
and number
its
antecedent, but
its
case depends on
in the sentence.
its office
3.
as
Give the gender, person, and number of these
pronouns
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
4.
in the sentences given in
and
5.
He that is slow to anger is better than the mighty.

Do you know that girl who recently joined our class.-*
Give the gender, person, and number of the
nouns
16,
The rich man left all his money to his children.

The little animal ran to its hiding place.
The queen dismissed her waiting maid.
Hail to the chief who in triumph advances.
in
paragraphs
and
5,
paragraph
Lesson
10,
17.
Notice the case forms of these pronouns:

1.
It is
I.
2.
It is
he.
3.
It
was
she.
pro-
Lesson
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
92
4.
It
5.
It
was they.
was James and
I.
Observe that the nominative form should be used when a pro-
noun
in predicate with a verb.
is
Fill
6.
1.
each of these blanks with a personal pronoun
Who
2.
Was
3.
Who
4.
Have
did that
or
it
7.
It
8.
Lucy
It is
and
thought
are these?
and
5.
6.
was
It
Jennie and
been
to the city?
arrived last week.

it
was
could not have been
and
are in the
same
class.
LESSON XIX
PARSING
The
I.
Class
ent)
following
is
the order for parsing pronouns
number
gender, person,
(to
agree with
its
anteced-
case, syntax.
EXAMPLES
The boy
He
with
a pronoun, personal masculine, third, singular, to agree

antecedent, boy, nominative, subject of the verb studies.
is
its
/ is
with
learns because he studies.
have her book.
a pronoun, personal
its
common
antecedent, the speaker;
gender,
first,
singular, to agree
nominative, subject of the verb
have.
Her
with
its
a pronoun, personal feminine, third, singular, to agree

antecedent, the person spoken of; possessive, possessor of
is
book.
Who are
You
*
is
you?
(You
a pronoun, personal
Yon should always be parsed
plural verb.
are
;
who?)
common, second,
as plural, because
it
plural,* to agree
always requires a
^^9-^9^
m^fx^DuC^
PARSING
with
Its
93
antecedent, the person or persons addressed
nominative,
subject of the verb are.
Who
IVô
is
going
a pronoun, interrogative common, third, singular, to

antecedent, the person spoken of; nominative, subject
;
agree with
its
of the verb
z's
2.
is
going.
Model
She
for written parsing.
studies her lessons.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
94
6.
7.
8.
9.
common,
personal pronoun,
An
An
An
third, plural.
adjective pronoun, singular.
adjective pronoun, plural.
2^ Write a sentence having for
its
predicate nomina-
tive
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.
A personal pronoun, third, singular.

A personal pronoun, common, third, plural.
A personal pronoun, common, first, plural.
A personal pronoun, common, first, singular.

1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
An adjective
An adjective
its
object
pronoun, singular.
pronoun, plural.
A personal pronoun, masculine, third, singular.

A personal pronoun, third, plural.
A personal pronoun, feminine, third, singular.
A personal pronoun, neuter, third, plural.
<
LESSON XXI
1.
Write
sentences,
using nine different
personal
pronouns as predicate nominatives.

2.
Write an essay on the pronoun, defining the
ferent
classes
definition
and modifications, and
illustrate
will aid
you
Personal
Relative
Classes
each
by examples.
This outline
Interrogative
Adjective
Modifications
j
I
Gender
Person
Number
Case
dif-
95
LESSON XXIT
Review the
1.
2.
rules for punctuation
Lesson
capitals given in
2.
Insert the proper capitals and punctuation
marks
Use quotation marks where
neces-
in these sentences.
sary
and the use of
1.
What
2.
with fingers weary and worn,
so rare as a day in June, asks Lowell
is
with eyelids heavy and red,
woman
sat in
unwomanly
rags,
plying her needle and thread.

3.
My
friend's
name
is
henry
smith, and he lives in
boston, mass.
4.
how manifold
5.
School
will
are thy works o lord.
begin next Wednesday, and will close in
may.
6.
7.
Have you read the

Rover come here
life
of
Gen Grant
16.
Are your lessons prepared girls

tell me mother where the birds are going
Coal gold silver and copper are found in Colorado.
The desert of Sahara is large sandy and sterile.
Where are you going my little man said the gentleman.
Days months and ages shall circle away
It was a dark desolate region.
Adieu adieu my native land said Byron.
Dr Samuel Johnson was born in Lichfield England in
17.
The
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Will you
1709.
3.
settlement was
Write sentences
made
at
Jamestown Va
illustrating all the rules
you have
learned for the use of capitals and punctuation marks.
v^
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
96
LESSON
XXIII
CLASSES OF ADJECTIVES
An
1.
Adjective
is
word used
modify a noun or
to
pronoun.
Examine these phrases
2.
ripe apples, large apples, three apples, this apple.
You
observe that ripe and large
will
the apples, but three and this do not
3.
Descriptive Adjective
tell
is
tell
the kind or quality of
the kind or quality.
one that describes a
noun or pronoun by expressing some quahty belonging

to
it
4.
trees.
Definitive Adjective
a quality
5.
good boys, small
as,
is
one that does not express
several boys, those trees.
as,
Separate these adjectives into two
lists,
one con-
taining the descriptive and the other the definitive

high, low, green, long, one, hot,
first,
last,
sweet, hard,
that,
full,
the,
deep, beautiful, short,
heavy,
a,
an, sharp,
those.
6.
as,
Some
adjectives are derived from proper nouns
American from A^n erica, Spanish from Spain,
These are
called
etc.
Proper Adjectives, and each should
begin with a capital.

7.
Write a proper adjective derived from
England, France, Ireland, Mexico.

8.
Use
you wrote
in a sentence
in
paragraph
each of the proper adjectives

7.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
9.
The
1.
Jane's apple
2.
Lucy's apple
3.
Stella's apple is the sweetest of all.
is
is
97
sweet.
sweeter than Jane's.
apples referred to have the quality of sweetness, but they do
not have the same degree of sweetness.

different
degrees
Adjectives express three

degrees of quality, and as they express these different
when two
or more objects are compared, these degrees are

of Comparison.
called Degrees
10.
have three degrees of
Descriptive Adjectives
comparison
the Positive^ the Comparative, and
the
Superlative.
Giving the different degrees of an adjective
it,
or giving
its
Comparison
11.
is
called
Comparing
Comparison.
is
the only modification belonging to adjectives.
Compare
these adjectives
slow, quick, rough, large.
12.
Adjectives of one syllable form the comparative
by adding er
adding
to
the
positive,
and the superlative by
est to the positive.
If you should compare ignorant according to the above rule, you

would have ignorant^ ignoranter, ignorantest. This does not sound
well
therefore, such words are compared by using more and most
thus, ignorant, more ignorant, most ignorant.
;
13.
Adjectives of more than two syllables are com-
pared by placing before the positive

parative,
14.
and most
Compare
77tore
for the
for the superlative.
these adjectives
beautiful, voracious, intelligent,
comprehensive.
^^
com-
;;
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
98
,1
LESSON XXIV
RULES FOR COMPARISON
1.
Notice the comparison of these adjectives:

Positive
Comparative
Superlative
pretty,
prettier,
prettiest
gentle,
gentler,
gentlest
truthful,
more truthful,
more splendid,
most truthful;
most splendid.
splendid,
2.
Adjectives of two syllables ending in
are compared by using er and

tives of
two
or silent e
adjec-
compared with more and
are
syllables
Most other
est.
most.
Many words
are
made from
letters before or after
3.
One
or
them
more
letters
are called a suffix, but
word, they are called

4.
other words by placing one or more
thus, old^ older
2.
added
5.
Words ending
to i when
with
6.
i.
end of a word
to the
when they
are placed before a
pretty, prettier, prettiest
kind, inikind.
prefix.
Notice these words
change y
in
try, tries, tried, trying.
y preceded by
a suffix
is
consonant,
added not beginning
(Adjectives of one syllable are exceptions.)
Notice these words

thin,
thinner,
planned
thinnest
sit,
sitting
occur, occurred, occurring.
plan,
planning,
; ;; ;
(t-<
COMPARISON QY ADJECTIVES
Words
7.
of one syllable,
and words
one syllable accented on the
last,
of
99
more than
ending in a single
consonant preceded by a single vowel, double the

consonant before a
If
you add er or
notice
that the
suffix is
8.
suffix
final
beginning with a vowel.
^'vs
and ed or ing to love, you will

of wise and love is dropped before the
est to wise,
final e
added.
Words ending
in silent e
drop the
e before a suffix
beginning with a vowel.*

9.
Compare these words.
(Pay particular attention
to the spelling.)
hot, happy, sad, noble, big, lazy, treacherous, jolly, able,
white, peaceful, thin, red, thick.
10.
Some very common
their comparisons
11.
adjectives are irregular in
as
Positive
Comparative
good,
better,
best
bad,
worse,
worst
worst
Superlative
ill,
worse,
little,
less,
least
much,
many,
more,
most
more,
most.
A few descriptive
cannot be compared
as
adjectives,
from
perfect, square, round, perpendicular.

fect, it
These
three
(If
anything
is
per-
cannot be made more perfect.)
important rules of spelling should not be neglected.
Pupils should be drilled on
making mistakes.
their meaning,
them
until
they can apply them without
100
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XXV
REVIEW
10.
11.
The day was cloudy and the sea was very rough.
The noblest mind the best contentment has.
Diagram sentences
5.
above
lOI
i,
2,
4,
and
6, 7, 8,
11 of the
list.
LESSON XXVI
WRITTEN REVIEW
1.
Write answers
What
is
an
adjective.?
to the following questions
How many
Name
classes of adjectives?
and define each. Which class is compared? How many degrees

of comparison do adjectives have?
Name them. How are adjectives of one syllable compared?
Of three syllables? What adjectives of two syllables are compared like adjectives of one syllable?
What adjectives cannot be compared?
What
three rules of spelling have you learned?
Give examples
of each.
When
should a be used?
When
should
aji
be used?
Are adjectives always placed before the words they modify?

they ever used in the predicate with a verb?
If so, give
Are
an ex-
ample.
2.
Arrange your answers
so as to
make
to the
preceding questions
a connected essay.
LESSON XXVII
REVIEW
I.
Fill these
1.
It is
2.
It is
3.
It is
blanks with personal pronouns
who is standing by the gate.

who are coming to work.
who wants to go, not
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
102
2.
4.
Who
5.
Is
it
6.
Is
it
7.
Halt!
8.
Are you
there?
It is
who was expected?
men = men
1.
Sensible
2.
This
is
adjectives printed in italic to phrases
men sometimes
Courageous
6.
Wooden spoons were once
men
are needed.
shall
We
go
to school
5.
is grown
Tea is brought
Columbus sailed
6.
Houses are built
have a holiday
Cotton
4.
used.
phrases to these sentences
1.
differ.
2.
a inathe7natical problem.
The snake was lying in \\s> grassy bed.

The Spanish gentleman has departed.
Add
into a phrase
of honesty.
4.
3.
5.
it
Who comes
Change the
3.
4.
Is
who am expected to teach this class?

who is expected to arrive soon?
Sometimes a word may be expanded
as, Jionest
3.
there?
is
Parse the nouns, pronouns, and adjectives in these
sentences
The
4.
knife was sharp and keen.

To-morrow we shall be gay and happy.
The day is long and dark and dreary.
Frank will sometime be a famous man.
5.
The audience
1.
2.
3.
at
the concert
was respectful and atten-
tive.
Why
6.
is
no
comma
required in the third sentence?
in
paragraph
5.
THE VERB
LESSON
103
XXVIII
CLASSES OF VERBS
1.
2.
Verb
1.
2.
3.
What
By
is
a word that denotes action or being.

:
The boys walk.

The boys walked.
The boys will walk.
time
the third
is
expressed by the
first
word time. We say a verb

Past Tense, or Future Tense.
3.

1.
3.
4.
The
The
The
The
In what tense
Of
is
in the
Past time?
tense denotes present time.?
2.
the second.''
we use the word
In speaking of the time expressed by verbs,
instead of the
Which
By
sentence?
tense
Present Tense,
Future time?
boys walk.
boys are walking.
boys walked.
boys have walked.

is
the verb of the
first
Of
sentence?
the second?
the third?
What is the past tense of walk ? How is it formed from walk ?

What form oiwalk is used with are in the second sentence? With
have
4.
in the fourth
The form
sentence ?
of the verb
ending
in
used with have are called Participles.

present participle and walked
\s \.\iQ
mg
and the form
Walking
is
the
past participle of the
verb walk.
5.
Write opposite each of these verbs (i)
its
present
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
I04
and
participle, (2) its past tense,
(3)
its
past participle.
Watci your spelling

chop, play, hop, cry, study.
You
observe that the past tense and the past participle of
will
the above verbs end in ed.

6.
Such are
called
Write opposite each of these verbs
and
participle, its past tense,
its
all
Regular Verbs.
present
its
past participle
write, see, do, go, catch.
You
7.
and past participle of these

Such are called Irregular Verbs.
notice that the past tense
will
verbs do not end in ed.
Regular Verb
and past
participle
is
one that forms
by adding ed
its
past tense
to the present, in ac-
cordance with the rules of spelling.*

8.
An
Irregular
past tense
Verb
and past
is
one that does not form
participle
by adding ed
to
its
the
present.
9.
list,
Copy
these verbs, placing the regular ones in one
and the irregular

blow
in
another
CLASSES OF VERBS
105
LESSON XXIX
TRANSITIVE AND INTRANSITIVE VERBS
1.
You have
already learned that some verbs require
an object to complete their meaning, and some do not

as
2.
The dog caught

The dog barks.
The meaning of the first sentence is not complete we need a

to name the object that the dog caught.
The meaning of the second sentence is complete without adding
;
word
another word.
2.
to
Transitive Verb
complete
3.
An
its
hitransitive Verb
an object to complete
4.
is
one that requires an object
meaning.
its
is
one that does not require
meaning.
Pick out the verbs in these sentences, and
whether they are regular or

intransitive
1.
2.
3.
transitive
The boy threw
the ball.
A poor man wants some things.

A covetous man wants all things.
5.
Some roses bloom early.

The rain moistened the ground.
6.
This industrious boy received a suitable reward.
7.
Many
wild beasts inhabit Africa.
8.
A soft
answer turneth away wrath.
9.
Industry leads to wealth.
4.
5.
irregular,
Diagram the preceding sentences.
tell
or
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
I06
6.
7.
Write three sentences, each containing

1.
2.
An
3.
4.
An
We
regular, transitive verb.

irregular, transitive verb.
regular, intransitive verb.

irregular, intransitive verb.
have now learned that verbs are divided into
classes, as follows
I.
2.
According to form
Regular.
Irregular.
(Transitive.
According
*
* to Meaning
Intransitive.
LESSON XXX
VOICE
1.
1.
2.
In the
Columbus discovered America.

America was discovered by Columbus.
first
sentence, does the subject denote the actor?
What
denotes the actor in the second?

Notice that the form of the verb in the second sentence is not the
same as in the first. This change of the form of the verb to indicate
virord
whether the subject denotes the actor or the receiver of the
act, is
When
the subject denotes the actor (as in the first

sentence), the verb is in the Active Voice. When the subject denotes the receiver of the action (as in the second sentence), the
called Voice.
verb
is
in the Passive Voice.
2. Voice is that modification of a verb which shows

whether the subject denotes the actor or the receiver of
the action.
3.
The Active Voice
is
that form of the verb which
shows that the subject denotes the
actor.
VOICE
4.
The
Passive Voice
is
107
that form of a transitive verb
which shows that the subject denotes the receiver
of
the action.
you examine the two sentences given at the beginning of this
you will see that the object of the first sentence is the subject
of the second.
Now, as only transitive verbs can have an object,
it follows that only transitive verbs can have the passive voice.
If
lesson,
5.
Name
the voice of the verbs in these sentences
1.
John reads the
2.
lesson.
3.
The lesson
Mary loves
4.
Lulu
is
esteemed by
5.
Corn
is
planted in the spring.
is
read by John.
Ina.
all
the girls.
6.
Ships carry heavy burdens.
7.
Wendell
8.
9.
is
loved by his mother.
Mary writes carefully.

The letter was written with
care.
10.
Galileo invented the telescope.
11.
The hurricane destroyed a large barn.

The little porch was covered by thrifty vines.
The burglars were driven from the house by
12.
13.
a police-
man.
14.
6.
The
fox ran toward the south.
Change these sentences
active voice shall be passive,
voice shall be active.
the sentences
1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Do
so that the verbs in the
and those
in the passive
not change the meaning of
Washington gained the victory.

The boy plowed the field.
The shoe was repaired by the shoemaker.
The carpenter built the house.

The tinner made the bucket.
The letter was written by him.
The tailor made the coat.
The lesson was recited by Lloyd.
..
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
I08
7.
Write three sentences, each having

1
verb in the active voice.
2.
verb in the passive voice.
3.
An
intransitive verb.
LESSON XXXI
MODE
1.
Notice these sentences
2.
Henry studies.
Henry can study.
3.
Henry, study.
1.
In the
sentence, the statement
first
it
is
You
or
commanded
will notice
meaning
modes.
2.
Mode
is
called
form or use of the verb which shows
that
which the action or being
Mode
Indicative
;
as
is
General Grant went to Europe.
1.
2.
Indicative
as
expressed.
Oliver Wendell
is
used to assert a fact or an
question
Mode.
in
2.
The
is
from the above that verbs change their form

action or being in different manners, or
is
actual existence
4.
studies.
to study.
This modification of the verb
The
Henry
to express
the manner
3.
that
In the third sentence, he
can study, or has the ability to study.

ordered or
made
is
not said that he studies, but that he
Holmes
Mode
is
is
dead.
also
Did he go to Europe?
Has the letter been written?
used in asking a
MODE
5.
The
Potential
Mode
109
asserts the power, necessity,
Uberty, or possibility of action or being
as
He can read.
He must read.
He may read.
He might read.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The
sign of the potential
mode
may^ can, must, might,
is
could,
would, or should.
6.
The
questions
1.
Potential
as
May
Mode
used
also
is
in
asking
go?
Must the lessons be learned?

This mode is so called because the word potential means
having power.
2.
7.
Tell whether the verbs in these sentences are in
the indicative or the potential

Must
1.
mode
all
3.
4.
All hail,
5.
Macbeth that shall be king

Romulus founded Rome.
6.
There must have been a heavy rain

creek
7.
8.
is
1.
3.
is
9.
the
used to express a com;
as
Men, lay down your arms.
Come and see me.

Do not leave me alone.
subject of the verb in the imperative
the pronoun
last night, for
An old man was walking slowly down the lane.

Many wise proverbs were written by Solomon.
mand, a request, or an entreaty

2.
hereafter.
very high.
The Imperative Mode
The
the sailors perish?
He should have departed long ago.

Some authors have written many books.
2.
8.
able,
_y<??^
mode
is
nearly always
understood.
Write three sentences, each having a verb
imperative mode.
in the
no
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
LESSON XXXII
REVIEW
1.
Name
1.
2.
4.
5.
mode
of each verb in these sentences
7.
Passionate men are easily irritated.

Do not walk so fast.
8.
The
9.
10.
Idleness often leads to vice.

Live for something.
11.
In
12.
would have gone if I had known that I was needed.

If we would seem true, we must be true.
6.
13.
2.
the
Bring me some flowers.

I must not be careless.
Who is the King of Glory ?
Can that be the man?
The pupils have recited well.
prize cannot be obtained without labor.
all
climates, spring
is
beautiful.
Classify these verbs according to form (regular or
irregular) and, according to
meaning
(transitive or in-
Also, give the voice and
transitive).
mode
of
each
verb.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.
Nothing can supply the place of books.

What exile can flee from himself
Make hay while the sun shines.
The Union must be preserved.
.''
Spare me, dread angel of reproof.

jury could not agree in their verdict.
A verdict of guilty was reported by the jury.
They took my umbrella.
You should have been more careful.
A railroad has been constructed in Siberia.
The
Write three sentences, each having a verb in

1.
The indicative mode.
2. The potential mode.
(Use a different sign-word
each sentence.)
3.
The
imperative mode.
for
TENSE
4.
1 1

1.
2.
An
3.
4.
An
regular verb.
irregular verb.
transitive verb.
intransitive verb.
LESSON XXXIII
TENSE
1.
Tense
is
that
form or use
of the verb
which shows
the time of an action or being.

2.
The Present Tense denotes

I
3.
The
I
4.
write;
ain writing;
Past Tense denotes past time
as
as
wrote.
shall write or
The word perfect

it
do write.
The Future Tense denotes

I
present time
as
will write.
naming
often used in
is
future time
means finished or completed.

Each tense (present, past, and
tenses.
When so
used,
future) has a perfect tense
finished tense.
In this sentence, "
Boston
is
finished
have been
now
at
in
Boston a month,'' the being in

This is called the Present-
present.
Perfect Tense.
In this sentence, "I had been in Boston before you saw me,"
the being in Boston was completed
This
is
when you saw me
past time.
called the Past-Perfect Tense.
In this sentence, "
mas," the being
Christmas
in
future
shall
Boston
time.
is
have been in Boston before next Christnot finished yet, but will be before next
This
is
called the Future- Perfect Tettse.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
112
Present-Perfect Tense
The
5.
expresses action or
being as completed at the present time.
The
sign of the present-perfect tense
The
6.
have or has.
Past-Perfect Tense expresses action or being
as completed at
The
is
some past
sign of this tense
time.
had.
is
The Future-Perfect Tense expresses
7.
ing as completed at
The sign
You now
present,
of this tense
and
future),
action or be-
time.
shall have or will have.
is
see that there are six tenses
Name
8.
some future
and three
three simple tenses (past,
perfect tenses.
the tense of each of these verbs
walks, has walked, walked, had walked, shall walk, shall
have walked is torn, shall be torn, have been torn,

has been torn, had been torn, shall have been torn
shall write, will write, has written, have written, had
;
written
he sees, he shall have seen, he has seen.
LESSON XXXIV
REVIEW
All the verbs given in the last lesson are in the indicative mode,
which
As
the only
is
mode that has the six tenses.

mode is used in expressing
the imperative
and as
entreaty,
present,
it
either
of these can be
follows that the imperative
command
or
expressed only in the
mode
has but one tense
the present.
The
and
of
mode has only the present, present-perfect, past,

The sign of the present is inay^ candor fniist;
present-perfect, may have., can have., or must have ; of
potential
past-perfect.
the
the past,
have.,
mi'irhl,
could^ wojdd^ or should; of the past-perfect, might
could have., would have, or should have.
In the potential
mode
Thus,
of the tense does not always indicate the time.
might go is called past tense, but the time is either present or future.
the
name
REVIEW
1.
All of the following verbs are in the potential
Name
mode.
may
the tense of each one
walk, can walk, must walk,
may have walked, must
have walked, might walk, could walk, would walk, should

walk, might have walked, could have walked, would have
walked, should have walked might be struck, may strike,
;
should have struck
can
must have seen, would

2.
could be seen, could see,
see,
see.
Write two sentences having the verb

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
The
in
indicative present.
indicative present-perfect.
indicative past.
indicative past-perfect.
indicative future.
indicative future-perfect.
imperative present.
potential present.
potential present-perfect.
potential past.
potential past-perfect.
LESSON XXXV
PERSON AND NUMBER OF VERBS.
1.
verb
may
vary
of its subject; as,
number
of
its
its
go,
subject;
THE INFINITIVE
form according
lie
goes
to the persoti
or according
as, Jie writes,
to the
they write.
Since verbs change their form according to the person and

number of the subject, they are said to have the same person and
number
2.
as the subject.
verb must agree with
number,
hoenshel's
e:ng.
gram.
its
subject in person and
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
114
3.

1.
2.
The boy runs.

The boys run.
The verb runs is singular, because its subject is singular.

The verb 7'im is plural, because its subject is plural.
You will notice that while nouns ending in s are generally
plural
verbs ending in s are singular.

4.
The
modifications of the verb are voice, mode,
tense, person,
Notice these phrases
5.
1.
2.
What
6.
and number.
To
To
Boston.
write.
part of speech
The form
is
Boston f
What
part of speech
of the verb used with to
is
is
write
called the
Infinitive.
Each of the following phrases
is
an
infinitive
have
to write, to
written, to be written, to have been written.
each containing an
7.
Write
8.
Write two sentences, each containing a verb in
six sentences,
infinitive.
the
1.
First person, singular.
2.
Third person, singular.
3.
First person, plural.
4.
5.
9.
10.
Second person, plural.

Third person, plural.
Write four different
The
following
Class according to
is
infinitives of the
verb
love.
the order for parsing a verb
form (regular or
irregular),
according to meaning (transitive or intransitive)
class
voice
PARSING
mode, tense
IIS
person and number to agree with
its
subject.
EXAMPLES
Franklin invented the lightning rod.
Invejited
a verb
is
regular,
transitive
active voice, indicative
mode, past tense third person, singular number,

subject, Franklin.
;
The
Has
fox has not been seen.
been seen
indicative
is
a verb
irregular,
mode, present-perfect tense
ber, to agree with its subject,
11.
to agree with its
Remember
transitive
passive
third person, singular
voice,
num-
/27.i'.
that all verbs in the passive voice are
transitive.
12.
The
following
Class
as to
fortn
invented
has been
seen
is
model
for written parsing:
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Il6
10.
Bunyan wrote the " Pilgrim's Progress."

The pitcher has been broken.
The architect has built an iron bridge.
1 1
The
12.
When
13.
Have you been
8.
9.
was recovered.
you go?
stolen watch
will
waiting Ion
r?
14.
Does the earth revolve round the sun
15.
The
16.
sailor has visited nearly all the principal cities of
the world.
2.
shall
have visited London by next Fourth of July.
LESSON XXXVII
REVIEW
Name
the
subject,
predicate,
and object
of
these
sentences, and parse the verbs

1.
2.
3.
5.
Our guide had never visited the cave.

The guest was admitted into the parlor.
6.
He
4.
.
The people of England speak the English language.

Come to the violet's shady nook.
The frightened animal sought the open country.
shrugged his shoulders, shook his head, but said
nothing.
7.
Rainy weather and muddy roads prevented further

progress.
8.
9.
The warm sun will soon melt the ice and snow.
The messenger might have come sooner.
10.
We
11.
should seek the truth.
12.
may have seen him once before.

Many can bear adversity, but few can bear contempt.
13.
Numbers
14.
"
15.
Sorrow cannot continue always.

Many excellent opportunities were
16.
are expressed
by ten Arabic characters.
can't get out," said the starling.
lost.
SHALL, WILL, MAY, CAN, TEACH, LEARN
117
LESSON XXXVIII
SHALL, WILL, MAY, CAN, TEACH,
1.
LEARN
Notice the use of shall, will, can, may, teach, and
learn, in these sentences

1.
Are you going
to
picnic
the
shall
go
if
it
does
not rain.
2.
think you ought not to go.
will
go
you
shall not
prevent me.
Can
May
5.
Remark.
2.
and
Many
Think
correctly.
make
go ? You probably have the power.

go ? You may.
Will you teach me how to solve this problem
you will try to learn.
3.
4.
Yes,
if
persons habitually use the above words inmeaning, and you will not often
carefully of their
a mistake in their use.
Use each
of the
leant, correctly in
You have
words
shall, will, can,
already learned that a verb agrees with
person and number.
may,
teach,
two sentences.
its
subject in
make mistakes
Careless persons often
use of the verb because they do not think of the right
word
in the
as the
subject.
3.
You
Examine these sentences.
will find that the
verbs agree with their subjects, although at
they
may seem
to disagree
1.
On
2.
One
3.
Down come
4.
Every one of the
what
tree
do these apples grow
of the boys
is
playing
rock-a-by baby and

girls
5.
Neither of the sick
6.
On
7.
ball.
all.
has her lesson.
men
is
better.
the table are a peach and an apple.
sack of large red apples
is
in the cellar.
first
sight
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
Il8
4.
Write seven sentences somewhat similar to the
seven just given, and be sure that the verb agrees with
its
subject.
LESSON XXXIX
WRITTEN REVIEW
Write answers to the following questions, and arrange
your answers so as to form an essay on The Verb
What
What
What
perative
a verb?
is
sitive verb
An
is
voice?
mode?
is
An
regular verb?
irregular verb?
tran-
intransitive verb?
The active voice? The passive voice?

The indicative? The potential? The
im-
What
is
Define the present tense
tense?
the present-perfect
the past-perfect
the past
the future
Give an
the future-perfect.
example of each tense.

What person and number do verbs have?
Hov^r many and what participles have you learned to give to each
verb ? How is the present participle formed ?
What
is
an
infinitive?
LESSON XL
ESSAY
Write an essay,
scribe
it
its
copy
it
words,
in
it
De-
you can about corn.
cultivation, uses, etc.
once, go over
better
telling all
After you have written
carefully, correcting errors, selecting
and improving
your sentences.
your best penmanship.
Remember
Then
that
you
THE ADVERB
II9
cannot learn to use good English except by always
doing your best.
To
the teacher:
Wheat,
and other products may be
cotton,
described in the same way.
LESSON XLI
CLASSES AND COMPARISON OF ADVERBS
1.
An Adverb
is
word used
to
modify a verb, an
adjective, or an adverb.
Some adverbs answer
the question, where ? as, here, there, yonder.

Adverbs of Place.
Some adverbs answer the question, when ? as, now, yesterday.
These are called Adverbs of Time.
Some adverbs answer the question, how ? or, in what manner ?
as, well, badly.
These are called Adverbs of Manner.
Some adverbs answer the question, how much ? or, to what
degree? as, almost., very, too. These are called Adverbs of Degree.
Such adverbs are
2.
The
called
adverbs,
principal classes of
their meaning, are
Adverbs
of Place,
according
Adverbs
to
of Time,
Adverbs of Manner, and Adverbs of Degree.

3.

1.
2.
3.
4.
Henry came soon.

John came sooner than Henry.
Robert came soonest of all.
Some
adverbs, like adjectives, have three degrees
of comparison.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
I20
5.
Compare
these adverbs
continually,
wisely,
mostly, calmly,
so,
rapidly,
partly,
always, very, too, perfectly, never, surely.
6.
An adverb of the positive degree.

An adverb of the comparative degree.
An adverb of the superlative degree.
1.
2.
3.
7.
Use each
what word
that
of these adverbs in a sentence,
modifies and what meaning
it
it
and
adds
tell
to
word
occasionally,
continually, where,
hither,
ashore, yonder,
whither.
LESSON XLII
REVIEW
1.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.
An adverb of place.
An adverb of time.
An adverb of manner.
An adverb of degree.
An adverb modifying a verb.
An adverb modifying an adjective.
An adverb modifying an adverb
Some words
adjectives
1.
are sometimes adverbs and sometimes
as
This train travels /^j/.
2.
It is
3.
He
2ifast train.
returned
late.
5.
have read the late paper.

This is a long lesson.
6.
Why
4.
did you remain so longi
PARSING
3.
Find two words (not given
are sometimes adjectives
121
paragraph 2) that
in
and sometimes adverbs.
Use
the words in sentences.

4.
Adjectives should not be used instead of adverbs.
3.
4.
men can be
Really (not real^ honest
1.
2.
found.
Did you sleep well {no\. good) ?

Almost (not tnosf) every boy was running.
The day was remarkably (not remarkable)
Really^
Remark.
almost,
well,
while real, good, most, and remarkable
LESSON
pleasant.
and remarkably are adverbs,
may be
adjectives.
XLIII
PARSING
1.
The
following
Class, degree
it
(if
is
the order of parsing an adverb:
compared), compare
it,
name
the word
modifies.
EXAMPLES
He
Here
is
lives here.
an adverb of
The
Well
is
place,
and modifies
lives.
clerk writes very well.
an adverb of manner, positive degree (compared 'tvell^

modifies writes.
Very is an adverb of degree, and
better, best),
modifies well.
2.
Parse the adverbs in these sentences

morning somewhere
1.
'Tis always
2.
3.
God
The
4.
Great scholars do not often become poets.
is
in the world.
everywhere.
inhabitants of
some
islands are very savagG.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
122
7.
The victory was fairly won.

The princess was extremely beautiful.
They were agreeably disappointed.
8.
Indolent pupils will not study hard.
5.
6.
9.
3.
How
well she can play
people are continually changing their minds.

very old house stands by the side of the road.
10.
Some
11.
12.
The
13.
How
train
came around the curve very

come
fast the flitting figures
in
rapidly.
paragraph
2.
LESSON XLIV
THE PREPOSITION
1.
its
preposition
object to
2.
some
is
word that shows the
relation of
other word in the sentence.
preposition with
its
object
is
called a Preposi-
tional Phrase.
3.
When
a phrase modifies a noun or pronoun,
an Adjective Phrase;
but
adjective, or an adverb,
4.
Many
man
1.
He
The messenger came
a wealthy
Change these
tional phrases,
it
an Advei^b Phrase.
meaning
2.
is
is
and adverbs can be expanded
adjectives
into phrases of a similar
5.
when
it is
it
modifies a verb, an
(a
man
as,
of wealth).
speedily (with speed).
adjectives
and adverbs
and use each phrase
to preposi-
in a sentence
carefully
kindly
brave
courageously
talented
educated
strong
boldly
REVIEW
Sometimes two or more words are combined and
6.
used as one preposition

to,
may be
In parsing, these
Use each
7.
above
of the
as,
over against, by means
8.
123
out
of,
from
over, in regard
of.
Compound Prepositions.
called
compound
prepositions mentioned
in a sentence.

1
2.
An
An
adjective phrase.
adverb phrase.
LESSON XLV
REVIEW
1.
Add
tences
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The bird sang to its mate.

The water turned the wheel.
The bells began to ring.
A
A
nest was found in the
meadow.
deer was shot.
7.
The leader was

Corn grows.
8.
Cotton
6.
2.
one or more phrases to each of these sen-
is
killed.
produced.
Change each
of the
words printed
in itaHcs to a
phrase
2.
The daily tasks are ended.

joyous and
The lark sang
3.
All children like picture books.
1.
xX.'s,
4.
He
5.
Study
returned hastily.
diligently.
blissful songs.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
124
The word
3.
sometimes
it
there
is
not always an adverb of place
merely introduces a sentence and has no
connection with
it.
In such cases
it
may be
called an
expletive^ or an introductory word.
There is an end to all things.

There he stands. (Adverb.)
1.
2.
(Introductory.)
Do
not
4.
Write three sentences introduced by
5.
Write three sentences containing there an adverb
call there
the subject in such sentences.
there,
of place.
6.
Write a sentence containing
7.
Use
all in
8.
their.
there, introductory, tJiere,
an adverb, and their
one sentence.
Fill these
blanks with
There
There
There
There
There
There
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
is
or are
flowers in the garden.
many people
there.
an apple and a peach in the basket.

no one at home.
apples on the trees.
no signs of spring.
LESSON XLVI
THE CONJUNCTION AND THE INTERJECTION
You have
junctions.
already learned that connecting words are called con-
Nearly
all
the conjunctions used thus far in this book
have connected simple words

adjectives.
as,
two nouns, two verbs, or two
THE CONJUNCTION AND THE INTERJECTION

1.

1.
He
2.
The Dead Sea
sailed
125
on the sea and on the ocean.

is salt, but Lake Superior
is fresh.
In the first sentence the conjunction and connects the two phrases,
on the sea and on the ocean. In the second sentence there are two
A subject
assertions, or two subjects, each with its own predicate.
and predicate used as a part of a sentence are called a clause.
2.
Conjunction
is
word used
to
connect words,
phrases, and clauses.

3.
Write two sentences, each having a conjunction
connecting
Two words.
Two phrases.
Two clauses.
1.
2.
3.
4.
In Interjection
is
word used
to denote
strong
feeling or emotion.
Interjections are
5.
sometimes called Exclamations.
Write sentences, using the following words as
interjections
hush, alas, ah, hurrah, oh, well, hark, ha.
Be
6.
careful to use the proper punctuation
We
mark
after interjections.
have now learned that the words we use
in
speaking and writing are divided into Nouns, Pronouns,

Adjectives, Verbs, Adverbs, Prepositions, Conjunctions,
and
7.
Interjections.
Try
These are
called Parts of Speech.
to use all the parts of
speech in one sentence.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
126
LESSON XLVII
ANALYSIS AND PARSING
The
1.
tions
In
following
the method for parsing preposi-
is
and conjunctions
1.
He lives in Paris.
:
a preposition, showing the relation of Paris to lives.
is
We
2.
Ajid
went
to Paris
and
Berlin.
a conjunction, connecting Paris and Berlin.
is
2.
3.
Analyzing a sentence
simple sentence makes but one assertion.
ject, predicate,
and
object,
is
naming
its
class
and the modifiers
sub-
its
of each.
analysis,
It is important to have a systematic and logical form of
using no more words than necessary. Example: "The king of
England gave many
castles
to his faithful followers."
simple, declarative sentence, of which ki7ig
is
This
is
the subject, modified^
by the adjective the and the adjective phrase of England. Gave is

the predicate, modified by the adverb phrase to his faitJifid followers.
Castles is the object, modified by the adjective tnany.
will be observed that this method of analysis includes conIt
siderable parsing.
Notice that after naming the subject, you should
predicate,
you
will
4.
naming
before
modifiers
the
When
predicate.
name its modifiers before naming

much needless repetition.
name
all
you name
the object.
By
its
the
so doing,
avoid
Analyze these sentences, and parse
(These sentences are
all
all
the words.
simple.)
men do not keep their promises.

man spoke kindly to the little girl.
1.
Very
2.
4.
The tall
The careless girl plays her scales too rapidly.
The dark clouds came up very suddenly.
5.
She
6.
3.
often
is
will
painting the head of a
be there
in a
minute.
girl.
LESSON
127
XLVIII

1
beautiful vase
fell
with a crash to the floor.
2.
Behind the clouds the sun
3.
Under a spreading chestnut
is
shining.
the village smithy
tree
stands.
4.
5.
6.
large black dog stood on the steps of the house.

Longfellow wrote several beautiful poems for children.
People have come to America from many different
countries.
7.
8.
Tell was a skillful archer of Switzerland.

The largest body of fresh water in the
world
is
in
America.
9.
many
After
attempts
fruitless
he
abandoned
enterprise.
10.
1 1
A lady's society is a school of politeness.

Bacon's essays contain valuable information
Diagram the preceding eleven sentences.
LESSON XLIX
1.
It fell
2.
He
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
through the
air to
the ground.
crossed the plains in a wagon.
The
The
injured
man was
taken from under the ruins.
came from beyond the sea.

Carthage and Rome were rival powers.
The book on the desk is a dictionary.
Each of the workmen is in his place.
You should be polite to everybody.
traveler
Idleness
is
the key of beggary.
Out of the house and up the
street
he ran.
the
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
128
He
PART THREE
LESSON
CLASSES OF SENTENCES
1.
A sentence is
2.
According
clarative,
3.
a thought expressed by words.
to use, sentences are divided into
De-
Interrogative, Imperative, and Exclamatory.
Declarative Sentence
is
one used
in
making a
statement.
4.
An
Interrogative Sentence
is
one used in asking
a question.
5.
An
Imperative Sentence
one used in making
is
command.
6.
An
Exclamatory Sentence
is
one used
in
an ex-
clamation, or in expressing strong feeling or emotion

as
What
2.
How
a piece of work
beautiful
is
is
man
the setting sun!
7.
Write three exclamatory sentences.
8.
subject combined vîth
called a Proposition.
130
its
predicate
is
often
CLASSES OF SENTENCES
According
9.
fgrm^ sentences are divided
to their
Complex, and Compound.
into Simple,
10.
13
Simple Sentence contains but one proposition
as
1.
2.
3.
Mary reads.
Mary and Lucy read.
Mary reads and writes.
In the second sentence there
has two subjects.
only one proposition, but the verb
is
Such a subject
called a
is
Compound
Subject.
In the third sentence there
is
only one proposition, but the sub-
This
is
called a Co)npou7id Predicate.
ject has
Of
two predicates.
there
course
predicate, or
11.
subjects for the
for the
more than two predicates
same
1.
3.
A compound subject.
A compound predicate.
A compound subject and
proposition
compound
used as part of
same
subject.
Write two simple sentences, each having
2.
12.
may be more than two
predicate.
sentence
is
called a Clause.
13.
Examine
Henry
'
is,
this
sentence
learns, because he studies.
The first
In this sentence there are two propositions or clauses.
learns ; and the second is, because he studies. Because he
Henry
studies modifies learns
it tells
why he
learns.
Because
this clause
used as a modifier and depends on some other word {learns), it is

Henry learns is called
called a Dependent or Subordinate Clause.
is
the Independent or Principal Clause.

14.
An
Independent Clause
is
one not dependent on
any word, and contains the principal proposition.

15.
Dependent Clause
is
one that modifies some
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
132
word or words
independent clause, and contains
in the
the subordinate proposition.
i6.
Complex Sentence
one containing an inde-
is
pendent clause and one or more dependent clauses.

Write a complex sentence, connecting the two
17.
t^lauses
by
when, where, while,
Name
18.
if,
unless, although, after.
the independent and the dependent clause
of each sentence you have just written.
LESSON
IT
THE ADJECTIVE CLAUSE

You have
1.
is
already learned that a relative pronoun
By examining
a connective.
these sentences you will
observe that the relative pronoun
is
found
in the de-
pendent clause of a complex sentence, and

cedent
is
found
in the
The boy who gained

This
3.
The house
The independent
This
is
the book,
the prize
the book that

in
which
clauses are,
and The house
is
praised by his teacher.
want.
live is built of stone.
The boy
is built
clauses are,
who fâined the prize,
that
Relative Pronoun
is
2.
ante-
independent clause
2.
is
its
is
of
praised by his teacher,

The dependent
stojie.
I watit, and
in
which I
live.
one that relates to some
preceding word or words, and connects clauses.
CLAUSES
Remember
that a relative
pronoun
133
always in the dependent
is
clause of a complex sentence.
3.
dependent clause may modify a noun or pro-
noun, a verb, an adjective, or an adverb, or
used as the subject or object of a sentence
According
4.
to use, a
An
therefore
dependent clause may be an
Noim
Adjective Clause, an Adverb Clause, or a

5.
may be
it
Adjective Clause
one used
is
to
Clause.
modify a
noun or pronoun.
Name
6.
tences,
the adjective clause in each of these sen-
and parse the
relative
pronouns
6.
The man who cannot govern himself is a slave.

The ship that left the harbor never returned.
The fur which warms a monarch once warmed a bear.
Beauty is the mark that God sets on virtue.
The fish that we caught was a trout.
The lady whose house we occupy gives much to the
7.
Whom
8.
Savages,
9.
He who
1.
2.
3.
4.
5
needy.
ye ignorantly worship,
who have no
Him
declare
settled abode,
unto you.
wander from place
to place.
governs himself
7.
Analyze each
8.
The
off
is
a hero.
of the preceding sentences.
adjective clause,
when not
restrictive,* is set
by a comma.
An
adjective
clause containing
the
relative
that
is
generally
restrictive.
9.
Write four complex sentences, each having an
adjective clause.
* Restrictive clauses will
be explained on page 249.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
134
10.
Notice these diagrams

The man who cannot govern himself is
I.
man
is = slave.
:
a slave.
The
who
can govern
I
not
2.
The
lady whose house

gives
lady
I
we occupy
himself
gives
money
to the poor,
THE ADVERB CLAUSE

If
5.
it
does not rain soon, the farmers
135
will
not raise
much
corn.
He
7.
lives where it never rains.

Napoleon was defeated because Grouchy was behind
8.
Webster died before the
9.
He
6.
time.
walks as
War
Civil
began.
do.
In the third sentence, the adverb clause denotes concession

the
fifth it
3.
in
denotes condition.
An
is
set off
word
it
modifies
closely follows the

1.
by a comma, unless
adverb clause
When Bunyan
as
it
wrote the "Pilgrim's Progress," he was
in prison.
2.
Bunyan was
in prison
when he wrote
the " Pilgrim's
Progress."
4.
Write two complex sentences, each containing
an adverb clause of time.

5.
Write one sentence containing an adverb clause
of manner.
6.
Write two sentences, each containing an adverb
clause of place.
7.
Write two sentences, each containing an adverb
clause of cause or reason.

8.
Write two sentences, one having an adverb clause
of condition
9.
and the other a clause of concession.

farmers
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
136
In a complex sentence, the simple conjunction
is
placed on a
dotted line connecting the predicate of the subordinate clause and

the word in the principal clause modified by the subordinate clause.
2.
shall
go
time
the
being a connective, wJufi
Besides
adverb), modifying comes

is
therefore,
when
it
an
is
is
adverb
(conjunctive
written under cojnes, and
connected by a dotted line to the word modified by the subordi-
nate clause.
LESSON IV
ANALYSIS
Notice the analysis of the following sentence:
1.
The man
that
fell
overboard was drowned before the boat
reached him.
This
is
is
a complex, declarative sentence
man
the independent clause, of which
is
the 7nan
was drowned
the subject, modified by
an adjective, also by that fell overboard^ a dependent, adjective

which that is the subject,/^// is the predicate, modified by
overboard^ an adverb of place was drowfied is the predicate of the
independent clause, modified by before the boat reached him, a
dependent, adverb clause of time, of which boat is the subject, modi-
the^
clause, of
fied
by
object
2.
the,
an adjective, reached
is
him
was drowned.
the predicate, and
before connects the adverb clause to
Analyze these sentences according
is
the
to the preced-
ing model
1.
Men
that are old
and wise should be consulted by the
young.
2.
The
criminal fled from the country
broken.
whose laws he had
THE NOUN CLAUSE

Maize, which
3.
137
another name for Indian corn, grows in
is
America.
am
4.
not solitary while
though nobody
read,
is
with me.
will go.
5.
Whither thou
6.
Confidence cannot dwell where selfishness
goest,
porter at
is
the gate.
Measure your mind's height by the shadow it casts.

sentence the connective is a relative pronoun understood,
7.
In this
which
is
the object of casts.
One who
8.
is
contented with his present attainments
will
never become famous.

9.
10.
The house where we live is very old.

By the banks of "bonny Doon " stands
the cottage in
which Robert Burns was born.

3.
in
paragraph
2.
LESSON V
THE NOUN CLAUSE
I.
Noun
1.
Clause
one used as a noun
is
That Columbus discovered America,
is
as
a historic
fact.
In this sentence, the dependent clause, That Columbus discovered

clause
Ajnerica, is the subject of the verb is. Therefore it is a noun
The entire sentence is the independent
in the nominative case.
when the dependent clause is the subject, object, or part of
clause
the predicate.
2.
The
Bible says that
God gave Moses
the
Ten Com-
mandments.
In this sentence, that
is
God gave Moses
the object of the verb says.
case.
3.
Here the
The
question
clause.
How
is,
"
How
can we go
the
Ten Commandme7its
a noun clause in the objective
It is
.
"
can we go?
is
used in predicate with the
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
138
is,
fore
it is
2.
There-
and means the same thing as the subject question.

a noun clause in the nominative case.
verb
these sentences, pick
In each of
clause, and name
its
case
out the noun
1.
We learn
2.
men are created equal.

The general belief is, that
from the Declaration of Independence that

the
all
Northmen discovered
America.
3.
4.
5.
6.
That Hannibal was a brave general, is disputed by few.

A rolling stone gathers no moss,'' says an old proverb.
The Sadducees beHeved that there is no resurrection.
The prisoner's answer was, " I am not guilty."
"
noun clause used in the predicate (attribute

complement) is usually set off by a comma as
3.
Our
4.
3.
5.
6.
is,
that the prisoner
is
not guilty.
Write three complex sentences, each having
2.
name
decision
A
A
A
noun clause
noun clause
noun clause
for the subject.

in the predicate.
for the object.
Analyze the sentences you have

the case of each noun clause.
I.
just written,
and
That the earth was once a molten mass,
is
taught by
scientists.
That
earth
the
was
":
m ass
molten
once
is
taught
cr
"^
scientists.
That is a conjunction, used as an introductory word, and is

a dotted
placed above the predicate, with which it is connected by
line.
"
ANALYSIS
Where am
His cry was, "
2.
I ?
39
"
am
I
I
where
cry
His
The speaker said, "The Cubans
3.
are fighting the Span-
iards."
Cubans
are fighting
^l^g
speaker
Spaniard^
the
said
The
LESSON
VI
ANALYSIS
I.
Analyze these sentences

He asked, " What will the
:
next lesson be?
understanding,"
that borrows the aid of an equal
is an adjec{Oivn
"
own."
his
doubles
said Burke,
2.
"He
3.
tive.)
4.
"
knew that it was he.

Where are all the good buried?
"
inquired Lamb.
correct.
6.
Our conclusion is, that the statement is not

That the world moves, was believed by Galileo.
7.
The
5.
glitters
sentence for correction was, "All that
gold."
9.
is
an adverb of reason, modifying inverted.
give the reason, but asks for

10.
2.
not
would write
His statement was, "I wish that my friend
a book."
The teacher asked why I inverted the divisor.
8.
Why
is
" Here," said
It
it.
Tom,
"
Diagram the preceding
found them yesterday."
ten sentences.
does not
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
140
LESSON
VII
THE COMPOUND SENTENCE

Examine
1.
Mary
sentence
this
reads and Lucy recites.
In this sentence there are two clauses, but neither one

fier
is
a modi-
both are independent.
2.
Compound Sentence
more independent
The
is
one that contains two or
clauses.
connective between the clauses of a
compound sentence
is
usually a7id^ but, or, nor, etc.

3.
Write a compound sentence, connecting the two
clauses
by
and,
or, but, nor.
Write a simple, a complex, and a compound sentence with each of these words
4.
engine, soldier, farmer, rain, clouds.

5.
Notice this diagram
Lincoln was President and Hamlin was Vice-President.
Lincoln
Hamlin
was
President
was
Vice-President.
The conjunction (coordinate conjunction) connecting the

compound sentence is written on a double-dotted line.
clauses
of a
6.
Analyze these sentences, then diagram them

1.
The army must
gain a victory, or our cause
will
be
ruined.
2.
3.
was administered under the shade of a forest

and the jury sat upon a log.
Prosperity makes friends, but adversity tries them.
Justice
tree,
PHRASES
LESSON
141
VIII
CLASSES OF PHRASES
1.
phrase
is
a group of words properly combined,
but not having a subject and predicate.
With respect
2.
and
Infinitive,
3.
to form, phrases are Prepositional,
Participial.
Prepositional Phrase
is
one whose
first
word
is
a preposition.
4.
Participial Phrase is
one whose
first
word
is
participle.
In poetry, the preposition or the participle may not be the first
of the phrase, but it will be the first when the words are arranged
word
in their natural order.
An
5.
Infinitive
Phrase
is
one introduced by an
in-
finitive.
With respect
6.
to use, phrases are Adjective,
Ad-
verb, and Noun.

7.
An
8.
An Adverb
9.
A Noun
Adjective Phrase
Phrase
Phrase
is
is
is
one used as an adjective.
one used as an adverb.
one used as a noun.
Usually only phrases introduced by a preposition,
an
infinitive,
mar, but
trees
or a participle, are called phrases in gram-
many
other expressions are phrases;
an old man, must
go.
as, tall
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
142
10.
Classify the phrases in these sentences with re-
spect to form and use

1.
been conquered, was sent
having
Napoleon,
to
St.
Helena.
2.
stack of wheat standing on the
hill
was struck by
lightning,
3.
11.
5.
6.
To meet
7.
The
prize
lady wished to learn to sing.

truth
is
our duty.
difficulties
bravely
was given
is
to
conquer them.
boy in the room.
to the smallest
Write two sentences, each having

1.
2.
5.
6.
infinitive phrase.
adjective phrase.
adverb phrase.
noun phrase.

I.
A prepositional phrase.
A participial phrase.
An
An
An
3.
4.
12.
Franklin was sent to France to ask aid for the colonies.
The young
To tell the
4.
That lady wished
to learn to sing.
I
to sing.
THE NOUN
143
LESSON IX
ANALYSIS
Analyze these sentences, then diagram them
If
I
3.
spring has no blossoms, autumn will have no
1.
2.
fruit.
love to lose myself in other men's minds.
pronoun
it
sometimes followed by the noun
is
to
which
refers.
4.
When
5.
We
anger
rises,
think of the consequences.
should endeavor to secure the friendship of that
Being who holds
his
in
hands the
reins
of the
universe.
6.
He was
7.
We
The
The
8.
9.
anxious to go, but his friends restrained him.
know
not
when he
general opinion
is,
departed.
that exercise promotes health.
time, so long expected, finally arrived.
10.
Having
11.
Plants
12.
We go
carefully read the letter,
live,
grow, and die
he
laid
it
away.
but they do not
feel.
to school to learn.
LESSON X
THE NOUN
1.
2.
A
A
Noun
the
is
Proper
name
Noun
of anything.
name
the
is
of a particular per-
son, place, or thing.

3.
A Common
Noun
is
a general name, and can be
applied to any one of a class.

4.
of objects
Collective
;
Noun
is
name
applied to a group
as, herd^fafnily^ school, etc.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
144
An
5.
of a substance
6.
Noun
Abstract
;
Material
A Verbal
of a quality, not
as, love, hate.forgetftilness, etc.
Noun
matter or substance;
7.
name
the
is
as,
Noun
the
is
name
of
some kind
of
bread, meat, metal, flour.
is
one derived from a verb
as,
reading, ivalking, etc.

Verbal nouns are sometimes called Participial Nouns.
8.
Diminutive
Noun
is
one derived from another
noun, and expresses an object of the same kind but

smaller
as, leaflet,
Collective, abstract,
all
common
Jiillock.
material, verbal,
and diminutive nouns are
nouns.
The
9.
duckling,
modifications
of
nouns and pronouns are
Gender, Person, Number, and Case.
Gender
10.
is
a distinction of nouns and pronouns in
regard to sex.
11.
The Masculine Gender denotes
the
names
of
The Feminine Gender denotes
the
names
of
males.
12.
females.
The Common Gender denotes
13.
the
names
of either
males or females, or both.
The Neuter Gender
14.
denotes the names of neither
males nor females.

By
a figure of speech called Personification, neuter objects are
sometimes regarded as either masculine or feminine. Thus, the

sun, ti?jzey death, war, etc., are usually considered as masculine;
and the
earth, the 7noon, virtue, a ship, night, etc., are generally
considered as feminine.
Names
of objects conveying the idea of
GENDER
145
grandeur zre in the masculine when personified;

and names of objects conveying the idea of beauty or weaktiess are
" The sun shines in his splendor, and the moon displays
feminine.
strength, Power, or
her silvery light."
Sometimes, when the personification is strongly marked,

name of the personified object should begin with a capital
"Come, O gentle Spring! with all thy beauty."
15.
The
1
2.
gender' of nouns
By
By
different
words
different
is
indicated in three
as, boy,
terminations
the
;
as,
ways
girl; kmg, queen.

;
as,
emperor,
empress
exeaitor, executrix.
3.
By
different
prefixes
or affixes;
as he-goat, she-goat;
landlord, landlady.
16.
Study the masculine and feminine forms
nouns, and notice the formation of each

Masculine
of these
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
146
LESSON XT
PERSON AND NUMBER
Person
1.
that
is
modification
of
nouns and
pro-
nouns which denotes the speaker, the person spoken

or the person spoken
to,
2.
The
3.
The Second Person denotes
4.
The Third Person denotes
I,
First Person denotes the speaker.
the person spoken
the person spoken
to.
of.
is not often found in the first person, and when it is, it is

connection with a pronoun that stands for the speaker as,
" We, the meanders, of the Crescent
John, saw the Holy City."
A
used
"
of.
noun
in
Literary Society.
5.
Number
by which
it
that modification of a
is
noun
or
pronoun
denotes one or more than one.
6.
The Singular Number denotes but
7.
The
Plural
8.
The
plural
Number
is
one.
denotes more than one.
usually formed by adding s to the
singular.
9.
Nouns ending
plural
10.
by adding
to
s,
s/i,
ch, x,
and ^ form the
es to the singular.
Nouns ending
change y
in
in
and add
preceded by a consonant
Nouns ending
es.
ceded by a vowel simply add
s.
in
pre-
NUMBER
The
11.
plural
following nouns ending in
by adding
brief,
147
chief,
or fe form the
s
fife,
grief,
gulf,
hoof, handkerchief, mischief,
proof, reef, reproof, roof, safe, scarf, strife, surf, turf;
and
those ending in ff.
Other nouns ending
12.
add
in
f ox fe change /to
es.
13.
Write the plural of these nouns

daisy
v and
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
148
Some nouns
18.
are always singular
gold, silver, wheat, corn, molasses, logic.
Some nouns may be used

meant
19.
The
singular in
when
different kinds are
following are plural in form, but are always
meaning
mathematics, ethics, politics
news, gallows,
words ending
20.
in the plural
as, suga?^Sy coffees, cottons.
Some nouns
in ics.
Athletics
are alike in both
and other
usually plural.
is
numbers
deer, pair, sheep, trout, cannon, swine, grouse, series, species, corps.
21.
Write the plural of these nouns

man, goose, inch,
treaty, pulley, quarto, pufF, ox, species,
deer, half, party, safe, bunch, toy.
22.
Write the singular of these nouns

mice, children, ladies, lunches, series, tomatoes, cattle.
LESSON
XII
CASE
1.
Case
which shows
2.
is
their relation to other words.
A noun or pronoun used as the
sition is in the
3.
that modification of nouns and pronouns
noun or pronoun used
intransitive verb
1
2.
subject of a propo-
Nominative Case.
is
in the
in the predicate
Nominative Case
Napoleon was emperor of France.

Washington became president.
as
with an
CASE
When
a noun
passive voice,
in the
verb
Nominative Case; as
Architecture has been called frozen music.
2.
He was
4.
in the predicate with a
is
it is
149
elected captain.
noun used
as the
name
of a person or thing
addressed, or used independently,*
is
Case; as
in the
1.
Carlo come here.
2.
Solomon, a wise
in the
Nominative
man was
he!
Notice the punctuation of the above sentences.
5.
noun or pronoun used as the object
preposition
A
ing a
word may be
7ioise, I
Here
6.
in the objective case after a participle
Nouns denoting
" Hear-
weight, measure, value, distance,
The mountain
2.
This
is
Case without a govern-
three miles high.
man weighs two hundred /^2^/aJf.
Good butter is worth thirty cents ?i pound.

This plant has grown two inches since yesterday.
3.
Tell
as
1.
4.
is
as,
the object of the participle hearing.
time, etc., are in the Objective

;
turned.'"
7ioise is
ing word
of a verb or
in the Objective Case.
is
why each
of the words in
italic in
the preceding sentences
in the objective case.

7.

1.
2.
Who
What
*
The
is
wish to go.
wish Henry to go.
to
is
go
in the first sentence?
the subject of the
different varieties of
on page 240.
first
In the second sentence?
sentence?
Of
the second?
independent constructions
will
be explained
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
ISO
In the
first
sentence,
/,
the subject of the sentence,
the subject of the infinitive to go, and

8.
A noun
finitive
Henry
is
or pronoun used as the subject of an in-
in the
is
is
also the
is
subject of the infinitive to go.
Objective Case,
unless
it
is
also the
subject of the proposition.*

9.
Name
the case of each of the subjects of these
infinitives.
The father wishes his son to study grammar.

The son does not wish to study grammar.
The traveler planned to go to Africa.
The showman wanted his lion to be tamed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
10.
When
subject,
him
to
it
an intransitive
may
has an objective
infinitive
have an Objective Attribute; as,
want
be a teacher.
Here teacher
is
the attribute complement, but
tive case to agree with
It
///;;/.
may
it
is
in the objec-
properly be called Objective
Attribute.
11.

I
Mary, shut the door.
Mary
X
shut
door.
the
A word
2.
used independently is not connected with the sentence.

The mountain is three miles high,
mountain
The
is
- high.
miles
three
When
the subject of the infinitive is a predicate noun,

as, " He is the man to be blamed."
nominative case;
it
is
in the
..
APPOSITION
noun
gramed
as
151
in
the objective case without a governing word
if
it
is
dia-
were the object of a preposition, but nothing
As no preposition
written on the preposition Hne.
is
is
understood,
no cross should be used.

3.
wish Henry to be a merchant.
Henry
I
wish
\^
LESSON
to
be
merchant.
XIII
APPOSITION
1.
Write two sentences, each having a word
in the
nominative case
2.
noun
1.
In predicate with a passive verb.
2.
Used independently.
Write two sentences, each having a noun or proin the objective case
Object of a participle.
4.
Object of an infinitive.
Without a governing word.
Subject of an infinitive.
5.
Objective attribute.
2.
3.
3.
is
is an industrious boy.
saw Henry, the bootblack.
Henry, the bootblack,
2.
Does bootblack refer to the same person

word bootblack in these sentences?
as
Henry ?
Of what
use
the
4.
or
noun
pronoun
as the
is
or
pronoun used
said to be in the
word explained.
to explain
another noun
same case by apposition
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
152
In the first sentence given in paragraph 3, bootblack is in the

nominative case in apposition with Henry, and in the second
sentence it is in the objective case in apposition with Henry.
A noun in apposition is usually set off by a comma.

A noun clause may be in apposition with a word
5.
6.
as,
"
The
doctrine that
held by our fathers."

are created eqital,
is
men are created equal, was

The noun clause, that all men
all
in the nominative case in apposition
with doctrme.
7.

that
I.
men
REVIEW
153
LESSON XIV
REVIEW
Name
the case of each
noun and each noun clause
in
these sentences, then diagram the sentences

1
Think that to-day
shall never
dawn
again.
4.
We remained a week at Saratoga.

We rode three hours through a beautiful
We walked four miles an hour.
5.
Some houses
2.
3.
in
valley.
Chicago are one hundred and
fifty feet
high.
6.
Franklin, the philosopher and statesman, was American
7.
Mr. Roberts, the teacher, gave his book, a grammar, to

Henry, his oldest pupil.
This man desires his son to be a lawyer.
Do you believe that old proverb, " Honesty is the best
minister to France.
8.
9.
policy
""
10.
It is
evident that
my
11.
The
order
is
this
friend
is
right.
" Follow your leader."
LESSON XV
REVIEW
Write two sentences, each having a noun
4.
Nominative
Nominative
Nominative
Nominative
5.
Objective case in apposition with the object.
6.
Objective case without a governing word.
1.
2.
3.
in the
case in predicate.
case in apposition with subject.
case in apposition with predicate noun.
case by direct address.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
154
Write a sentence having a noun clause
2.
with
Nominative case, subject.

Nominative case in apposition with the subject.
1.
2.
3.
in the
3.
Nominative case
4.
Objective case, object of a verb.
5.
Objective case in apposition with a noun.
in the predicate.
Write a sentence containing a word
in apposition
the
Hudson, London, Shakespeare, Europe, William Mc-
Kinley, Victoria.
LESSON XVI
THE POSSESSIVE CASE
1.
The
Case denotes
Possessive
possessor, or
the
owner.
2.
Singular nouns, and plurals not ending in
the possessive by adding the
apostrophe
Plurals ending in s add the apostrophe

3.
nouns
and s*
only.
dog
boy
man
lion
city
foot
fox
child
tooth
ox
pony
mouse
When
the
same thing belongs
common, the possessive

as
form
Write the possessive singular and the possessive
plural of these
4.
(')
(')
s,
sign
is
1.
2.
See
Parker and Wilson's store.

Lucy and Mary's books.
page 241.
to
two or more
added only
in
to the last
THE POSSESSIVE CASE
155
and Wilson's store means that each owns a store. Parand lVilso?i's stores means that each owns more than one store.
Parker and VVilsoiCs stores means that they own more than one
Parker's
ker's
store in partnership.
5.
sign
When
is
two nouns are
added only
object possessed
1.
King Henry's dominions.
2.
Henry, the king's, dominions.
In each of these sentences
the last
word
1.
2.
7.
is
Such complex nouns
lington, etc., use but

;
as
are both
Henry and king
sessive case, but only one sign

6.
one nearest the name of the
to the
as
in apposition, the possessive
in
the pos-
used.
Duke of
as son-in-laiv,
one possessive
sign,
Wel-
and add
it
to
His son-in-law's home.

The Duke of WelHngton's career.
The
following
sentences
are
correct.
all
Give
reasons for the use of the possessive sign

1.
These are neither Luther's nor Lucy's books.
2.
This occurred during neither Lincoln's nor Grant's
ad-
ministration.
3.
Smith, the captain's,
4.
5.
6.
7.
life
was
full
of adventure.
bought this book at Johnson, the bookseller's,

Brown and Green's factory is large.
Bowman's and Haddam's house are large.
Bowman's and Haddam's houses are large.
store.
word house is understood after the word

Bowman's. In the 7th sentence, the word houses is understood after
the word Bow?na7i's.
In the 6th sentence, the
8.
Correct where necessary.

1.
Howard's, the philanthropist's,
life
was spent
viating the sufferings of others.

2.
For the prisoner's sake, his brother's.
3.
He
did
it
at his
mother's request, a kind lady.
in alle-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
156
4.
The Bank
of
England was established
in William's
and
Mary's reign.
5.
This was neither the teacher nor the students'
6.
Whittier's,
the
poet's,
Snow-Bound "
"
is
desire.
much
ad-
mired.
7.
The Queen's
8.
Lewis
&
of England salary
is
large.
was made
Clark's expedition
in 1803.
LESSON XVII
REVIEW
1.
Write three sentences, each containing two or more
nouns denoting
2.
joint ownership.
Write three
sentences, each containing two
or
more nouns denoting separate ownership.

3.
Write a sentence containing the possessive singular
of
father-in-law, king of India,
4.
s
Change these expressions
essive case
The
Duke
thus
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
to the
form of the pos-
signature of the author

1.
of Wellington.
The author's signature.
The sting of the bee.

The stings of the bees.
The house of my friend George.
The domain of Alexander the Great.
The trial of Mary, Queen of Scots.
The home of Mary and Martha (sisters).
The homes of Mary and Martha (not sisters).
The poems of Bryant or Whittier.
The pianos of Root & Cady. (Joint possession.)
The pianos of Steinway and Chickering. (Separate
possession.)
THE PRONOUN
5.
A noun in the possessive
case
is
sometimes used
When
form a part of a complex or compound noun.

used,
should not be parsed separately
it
1.
Harper's Ferry
2.
Bunyan wrote
is
as
57
to
so
town on the Potomac.
" The Pilgrim's Progress:^
LESSON
XVIII
THE PRONOUN
1.
2.
The Antecedent
which
3.
it
son by
4.
Pronoun
5.
Personal Pronoun
is
one that indicates
is
stands.
per-
its
form.
Compound Personal Pronoun
Relative Pronoun
and
is
Compound
Relative
one that
is
of the personal pro-
some forms
to
is
selves for the plural.
one that relates
preceding word or words, and connects

6.
the word for
pronoun
self for the singular
of a noun.
word used instead

a
formed by adding
nouns
of
its
is
Pronoun
formed by adding ever or soever
to
some
clauses.
is
one that
to the relatives
is
who,
which, and what.

7.
What, when a
which,
or the
Relative,
relative, is equivalent to the thing
things
which, and
is
called
a Double
:: :
::
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
158
8.
An
Interrogative Pronoun
one used
is
in
asking
questions.
9.
An
offices of
Adjective Pronoun
one that performs the
is
an adjective and a noun.
Adjective Pronouns are sometimes called Pronominal Adjectives.

10.
11.
may be
Adjective Pronouns
strative Pi'onouns
The Demonstrative Pronouns
Demon-
are
Plural
Singular
12.
divided into
and Indefinite Prononns.
this
these
that
those
The most common
Pronouns are
Indefinite
any, each, either, neither, feiv, many, none,
one,
all,
other,
another, some, several, such.

13.
pronoun must agree with
gender, person, and number, but
by
its office in
14.
To
its
antecedent in
its
case
is
determined
the sentence.
Decline a noun or pronoun
is
various forms to represent the different
to
give
its
numbers and
cases.
DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
^
^
i^
^
^
5;
Nominative
thou
you
Possessive
my, mine*
thy, thine*
your, yours* his, her, hers*
its
Objective
me
thee
you
him, her
it
Nominative
we,
ye
you
they
Possessive
our, ours
your, yours your, yours
us
you
[^
Objective
you
Most authors consider mine, thine, yours, and

For another view, see page 248.
case.
he, she
it
their, theirs
them
hers, in the possessive
RELATIVE PRONOUNS
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
l6o
Parse the pronouns
2.
to the
1.
Where
2.
My
lies
3.
He
4.
It
5.
It
me
to the church,
which stood
at a
distance from the village.
that
is
not with
me
is
against me.
of the
first it
it.
the noun clause that he should
is
it.
was James that we saw.

they who must go.
6.
It
7.
It is
8.
You
9.
Whom
10.
yourself should go.
did you see
may
//
and 7th sentences.

noun of the masculine or
in the 5th, 6th,
refer to a phrase, a clause, or to a
feminine, singular or plural, for

3.
Take what you want.
Notice the idiomatic uses of

It
93.
was a dreary road.

is strange that he should do
The antecedent
according
the land to which the ship would go
ramble soon led
little
do
in these sentences,
model found on page
antecedent.
its
in
paragraph
2.
LESSON XX
REVIEW
1.

1.
2.
3.
4.
2.
A
A
An
An
personal pronoun,
1.
3.
subject
first,
masculine.
adjective pronoun.

2.
its
personal pronoun, second, feminine.
A compound personal pronoun, first person.

A compound personal pronoun, second person.
A compound personal pronoun, masculine.
CHOICE OK PRONOUNS
4.
compound personal pronoun,
l6l
masculine,
singular,
nominative.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
A compound personal pronoun, plural, nominative.

A relative pronoun, nominative.
A relative pronoun, object of a verb.
A relative pronoun, object of a preposition.
A relative pronoun, possessive case.
A compound relative.
A double relative.
LESSON XXI
CHOICE OF PRONOUNS
1.
Of the
relative pronouns, zvJio
is
used for persons,
which for animals and things, and that for persons,

animals, and things.
It will
be seen that the only
in deciding
2.
when
That
1.
is
to
be preferred to zvho or wJiich
2.
3.
the
;
is
antecedent
as,
Give reasons for using that

1.
a relative
embraces both persons and

The soldiers and horses that J saw.
After the words all, very, and satne.
After an adjective in the superlative degree.*
When
things
3.
difficulty in the choice of
to use that.
The men and
cattle that
in these
sentences
were on the train were killed
in the wreck.
2.
3.
4.
5.
watched the boy and monkey that were entertaining

the crowd on the street.
This is the same book that my father used.
The thief lost all the money that he stole.
Solomon is said to have been the wisest man that ever
Hved.
For the use of that in restrictive clauses, see page 249.

1
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
l62
4.
Fill
the blanks with wlio (or
whom\
which, or
that:
4.
he trusted.
He was deceived by the friend in
assisted us before.
These are the same persons
he heard did not change his opinion.
All
These Germans still remember the friends and the
5.
home
The train on
6.
He was
1.
2.
3.
may be
{First
5.
the
they
left in
Europe.
you came was two hours
late.
succeeded.
first
considered a superlative.)
Give the reason for the case of each pronoun in
these sentences
1
To whom
2.
Whom
did he go
did he tell? her or him?
8.
was intended for either you or him.

was she.
It might have been they.
Know well whom you admit to your friendship.
This is between you and me.
I thought it was he.
9.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
10.
It
It
thought
Whom
be
it
to be him.
did you take him to be?
14.
There are few better men than he

He mistook her for me.
Do you know whom he sent?
Do you know who went?
15.
Them
11.
12.
13.
(You did take him
16.
honor me I will honor.

honor me.)
He wants you and me to go.
17.
He
18.
She
is
20.
Her
that
21.
Let us worship God, him
22.
Whom
that
(is).
(I will
that
19.
to
whom?)
is
as old as
(am)
younger than he.

This is for you and me.
is idle
are
the teacher will reprove.
who
you speaking to?
created us.
honor them
DRILL ON PRONOUNS
163
LESSON XXII
CORRECT CASE FORMS
blanks with pronouns in the correct case.
Fill these
Give reasons for your choice

1.
This
is
5.
He knows
Was it
What were
6.
My
7.
Her mother and
3.
4.
and
a secret between
it
was.
you met ?
talking about?
you and
brother did fully as well as
1 1
you wish to see ?

do you take me to be?
Mother went with sister and
12.
We
13.
Can you
9.
Is
city.
it
did not
the letter was from.
her
tell
and
teach
15.
younger than
The teacher asked
16.
It is
17.
He
14.
have gone to the
that seek shall find.
8.
10.
did you see?
2.
to
is
draw?
and
and
to stay.
that are to blame.
19.
met us on the bridge.

is the same man
house was burned.
There goes the man
The gentleman
you spoke to is my uncle.
20.
This
21.
The men and
18.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
you sent
the tools
sit
for
have arrived.
with?
know
you love.
do you think that I am?
Did you see Robert and
?
in the city.
I saw you and
I do not know
they said went.
Father told James and
to go to school.
I
29.
He
30.
She married a man

I saw the man
31.
we ever had.
the longest lesson
do you
22.
23.
is
married a lady
they say
I
I
know
think
is
is
very wealthy.
to be worthless.
to speak.
"
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
l64
32.
He
33.
All
addressed Lillian and

are
except^
it is
and
gone but
(When
but
means
a preposition.)
you said it was.

was
you said it to be.
was
go to school.
36. Lucy and
(This last blank can be filled by seven different personal pronouns. Find them.)
34.
It
35.
It
LESSON
XXIII
AGREEMENT OF PRONOUN WITH ANTECEDENT

Which and what often are interrogative adjectives
1.
as
Which book have you

he make?
1.
What answer did
2.
We
have now used what as an interrogative pronoun, a double

and an adjective. It is sometimes an adverb, meaning
relative,
partly
as, "
What by economy and what by
industry he amassed a
fortune."
IVkat
2.
is
also
an interjection
as,
"
What! did he go?
In these sentences each pronoun agrees with
antecedent in gender, person, and number.

carefully
its
Examine
1.
Each one of us must prepare
2.
Boys, every one of you
is
A/s
own
lesson.
responsible for
/its
own
conduct.
problems?
3.
Has everybody solved
4.
All the girls have t/iezr hats.
5.
6.
7.
8.
h's
Each girl has /ler hat.

Each person in the world should do /tis best.
Not an elk nor a deer made its appearance.
Many a man looks back on the days of /lis youth with
regret.
DRILL ON PRONOUNS
9.
10.
11.
165
Neither Mary nor Susan offered her assistance.

Mary and Susan offered their assistance.
If any one thinks it is easy to recite a poem in
public,
let hi7n try.
my
12.
The
13.
bosom.
Every governor and
earth
is
mother, and
upon her
will recline
magistrate does as he thinks
best.
14.
No man
or
woman
is
able to get rid of -^w vices without
a struggle.
Each man and woman must do
15.
The
his duty.
two sentences are grammatically correct, but different

wording would be better " each one must do his duty, " or " all
must do their duty."
last
Write eight sentences, each having a personal pronoun, or a compound personal pronoun, and be sure
Have
that each pronoun agrees with its antecedent.
such sentences as will show that you understand the
3.
subject.
LESSON XXIV
SELECTION OF CORRECT PRONOUN
Fill
each of these blanks with the proper personal
pronoun
to agree with its antecedent

1.
Every person should
try to
improve
mind and
heart.
2.
Each of our party
3.
4.
5.
work first.
Every soldier and every
carried a knapsack with
tion
all
officer
remained
Mary and Lucy will favor us with

Mary or Lucy will favor us with
8.
Notice
is
taxes.
at
night.
7.
6.
person who is resolute and energetic will be apt to

undertakings.
succeed in
did not notice which one of the men finished
company.
company.
hereby given to every person to pay
sta-
..:
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
I66
9.
All persons are required to pay
taxes.
10.
You borrow one
1 1
to the upper number.

Every herb, every flower, and every animal shows the
foot, or
twelve inches, and add
wisdom of Him who made
12.
Coffee and sugar are luxuries, but great quantities of

are consumed annually.
13.
If
any one wishes to join the church,
come
let
forward.
14.
It is difficult
15.
for
any judge or juror
to
be unprejudiced
opinion.
in
Every
city,
village,
and farm furnishes
quota of
soldiers.
16.
17.
18.
19.
This is such bad news that I cannot believe

If you find ' Longfellow's Poems," send
to me.
The audience kept
seats until the close.
If you have any molasses, please send me a gallon
.
of
20.
The government
will
be compelled to change
orders.
21
If
any boy or
girl
be absent,
must go
to the foot of
the class.
22.
Do you know which one
23.
essay first?
Lincoln, the President, the Emancipator,
Martyr, will always live in the hearts of
of the students wrote
and
the
coun-
trymen.
LESSON XXV
PARSING
Analyze these sentences, and parse the nouns and
pronouns
2.
was born an American, I live an American, and

shall die an American
He that would have the kernel must crack the shell.
3.
The
truly great
heart.
man
is
he who does not lose his child-
REVIEW
167
him who wrote " Paradise Lost.""

was Hadley, he who wrote a Greek grammar.
Reputation is what we are thought to be character
what we are.
4.
refer to Milton,
It
5.
6.
The tongue
7.
that
8.
it
is
the only
weapon
is
wounds
that can heal the
makes.
have heard of Byron, the poefs, dissipation.
was Joseph, he whom Pharaoh promoted.

is the book that we are to study.
I believe in a religion whose origin is divine.
Whoever comes shall be admitted. Whoever = he
who.
I remember what was said.
Conscience makes the bitter memory of what he was.
Whosoever will may come.
It
9.
This
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
LESSON XXVI
WRITTEN REVIEW
1.
Write two sentences each containing a noun

1.
In the nominative, attribute complement.
2.
In the nominative, apposition with subject.
3.
In the nominative, apposition with
attribute
comple-
ment.
2.
the
4.
In the objective, apposition with object of verb.
5.
In the objective, subject of infinitive.
6.
In the objective, objective attribute.
by apposition.
7.
In the possessive
8.
In the nominative, independent.
Write one sentence

first six
in
accordance with each of
of the preceding directions, using
instead of nouns.
pronouns
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
l68
XX vn
LESSON-
THE ADJECTIVE
An
1.
Adjective
is
a word used to modify a
noun or
a pronoun.
2.
Descriptive Adjective
is
one that describes a
noun or pronoun by expressing some quality belonging

to
it.
3.
Definitive Adjective
is
one that does not ex-
press a quality.
The
4.
times called Articles.
or
A
an
is
<3:;2
and the are some-
definitive adjectives a, an,
The
the Definite Article, and
is
the Indefinite Article.
used before words beginning with a consonant sound, and

Exbefore words beginning with a vowel sound.
is
used
is
amples
a horse, a
nest,
a union, an apple, an orange, an honest
fnan.
5.
Definite Adjectives that express
definitely are called
Numeral
number and order
Adjectives.
Cardinals denote simply the number of objects;
as, three, forty.
Ordiiials denote the position of an object in a series
as, third,
fortieth.
Mtdtipticatives denote
6.
how many
Proper Adjective
is
fold
as, threefold,
fortyfold.
one derived from a proper
noun
tives
should begin with a capital
as,
American, English, French.

letter.
Proper adjec-
COMPARISON
Comparison
7.
is
169
a variation of descriptive adjectives
to express the quality in different degrees.
are three Degrees
There
8.
Positive, the
The
9.
Comparative, and
Positive
of
Comparison
the
the Superlative.
Degree expresses the simple quality
as, large, luise.
expresses the quality
The Comparative Degree
10.
in a higher or lower degree
less wise.
as, larger,
The Comparative is used in comparing two objects or classes of

These two apples are
2^%, James is taller than his brother.
objects
larger than those three.
The
1 1
Superlative Degree expresses the quality in
the highest or lowest degree
The
Jupiter
Superlative
is
is
the la?'gest
as, largest,
least wise.
used in comparing three or more things
of the planets.
Samuel
is
as,
the oldest of the
three boys.
12.
Adjectives of
one
syllable
are
compared by
adding to the positive er for the comparative, and
est
for the superlative.
Review
13.
rules of spelling given in
Part Two.
Adjectives of more than two syllables are com-
pared by prefixing 7nore and most.

14.
are
Adjectives of two syllables ending in
compared by adding
Some
are
er and
or silent e
est.
adjectives of two syllables accented on the last
compared by adding er and
politest.
j/
est; as, polite, politer,
: ;;; ;
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
170
Some
adjectives ending in
ing er and est
ow
are
compared by add-
as, 7tarrow, narrowe}', narrowest.
Other adjectives of two syllables are compared by

prefixing more and most.
15.
Some
adjectives are irregular in comparison
bad,
worst
evil,
ill,
good,
better,
best;
little,
less,
least
many,
much,
more.
most
well,
nearest
next
old,
I
i
dim
older,
oldest
elder,
eldest.
COMPARISON
17]
LESSON XXVIII
CORRECT USE OF THE COMPARATIVE AND
SUPERLATIVE
1.
The comparative
considers the objects compared
as belonging to different classes.
The mother was fairer than any of her daughters.

Texas is larger than any other state in the Union.
2.
in paragraph i is sometimes expressed by saying,

comparative is used, the latter term of comparison
must exclude the former." In the second sentence just given,
the latter term of comparison is any other state, which does not
\i other is omitted,
include Texas, the former term of comparison.
the latter term will be a7iy state, which will, of course, include
"
The
rule
When
the
Texas.
2.
to
The
one
superlative considers the objects as belonging
class.
The
1.
The mother was
2.
Texas
rule
in
is
the fairest of
women.
the largest state in the Union.
paragraph
is
sometimes expressed by saying,
"When
the superlative is used, the latter term of comparison

In the second sentence just given,
must include the former."
the latter term of comparison is state in the Union, which will
include Texas.
Sometimes the use or the omission of a, an, or tJie

3.
makes considerable change in the meaning of the sentence.
The black and the white horse means two horses. The black and
white horse means one horse with two colors. A house and a lot
the house is not on the lot.
means two separate pieces of property
A house and lot means that the house is on the lot. He was
7narried to an amiable and an estimable woman means that he had
He was married to an amiable and estimable woman
two wives.
.
means
that he
had one
wife.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
172
4.
You have
already learned that adjectives
placed before the words they modify, or they
used
They may
in the predicate.
may be
may be
also be used Apposi-
as
tively ;
1.
2.
The snow, white and pure, covered the landscape.

The rose, beatUiful and fragrant^ is the fairest
of
flowers.
5.
them
The
sentences
following
are
Examine
correct.
carefully:
1.
2.
What
He
He
has another and better reason.

has another and a better reason.
difference in the
3.
He
4.
The
meaning of these two sentences
does not deserve the
name
of gentleman.
of the Euro-
whites of America are descendants
peans.
Why
not the descendants

5.
The
north and the south line of the field extend east
and west.
6.
7.
The north and south lines on

They extend north and south.
cattle are not
in Asia.
In some of these sentences the adjectives are used
incorrectly.
1.
2.
The
The
I
The
5.
7.
8.
Correct where necessary

right
and
left
hand were both diseased.
Latin and the Greek words in English are many.
do not admire those kind of people.

fourth and the fifth verse are short.
My uncle owns a large and small house.
One who rules is often known by the name of a king.
The sick and wounded were left in the camp.
I have not heard from home for this two weeks.
3.
4.
6.
7.
are meridians.
This kind of horses and these kinds of

found
6.
map
Observe that when the
article is repeated, the
verb
REVIEW
will
often be
may be
plural
173
although the subject expressed
singular.
1.
The
east
and the west end (not ends) of the house
are white.
2.
An
old
and a new book are on the
readily be seen that in the
It will
table.
above sentences one subject
is
understood.
8.
In the following sentences the comparative and
Study carefully
the superlative are used correctly.

1.
My
2.
Which
3.
4.
5.
6.
mother
is
is
the eldest of five sisters.
the better of the two
more useful than any other metal.

Iron is the most useful of metals.
This picture is, of all paintings, most fascinating to me.
China has a greater population than any other country
on the globe.
Iron
is
It will be observed that the comparative degree is generally followed by than, and that when than is used, we always have a complex sentence. When we say He is younger than /, the full sentence
is,
He
is
younger than I am young.
LESSON XXIX
REVIEW
1.
tives
Write two sentences, each containing three adjec-
1.
Placed before the noun.
2.
Used
Used
3.
2.
Make
Some
of
in the predicate.
appositively.
the following sentences
the proper changes

I.
The youngest
are
incorrect.
of the two sisters
is
the handsomest.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
174
2.
He
3.
The boy
4.
Gold
the boys in school.

all his classmates.
more valuable than any other metal found in
the strongest of
is
is
is
all
the brightest of
the United States.

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.
Natural scenery pleases me the best of anything else.

That tree overtops all the trees in the forest.
Our present teacher is better than any teacher we ever
had.
Our present teacher is the best we ever had before.
Nothing pleases me as much as beautiful scenery.

(Say nothing else. Why ?)
This man, of all others, deserves promotion.
Parse the adjectives in these sentences:

1.
2.
Wisdom
guilty conscience needs

is
no accuser.
better than rubies.
When the comparative degree is followed by than., there will

always be a complex sentence, and the positive degree of the same
word (often not expressed) will be found in the subordinate clause.
In such sentences than is a conjunctive adverb, modifying the word
in the positive degree and connecting the subordinate clause to the
word in the comparative degree.
Wisdom
is
better
rubies
(are
good)
I
than
8.
Every cloud has a silver lining.

Sugar is sweeter than honey.
New York is larger than Massachusetts.
Much money and abundant food were sent to the
needy sufferers of the lower Mississippi valley.
He wandered over the earth, sad and weary.
Large violets, blue and fragrant, nestled in the young
9.
The
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
grass.
visit
was a surprise
to me,
and
it
became very
interesting.
4.
graph.
in
the
preceding para-
175
LESSON XXX
1.
Analyse these sentences, and parse the nouns,
pronouns, and adjectives
2.
The end must

Fame is the last
3.
4.
justify the
means.
infirmity of noble minds.
friend should bear his friend's infirmities.
Of all sad words of tongue or pen,

The saddest are these " It might have been."
Did you find the book you wanted ? (Relative
:
5.
pro-
noun omitted.)
6.
7.
8.
This is the answer I expected.

Raphael painted some very wonderful pictures.
The weathercock on the steeple told, in all kinds of
weather, the direction of the wind.

Harold, the last Saxon king, was conquered by
William, Duke of Normandy.
10. Every one can master a grief, but him that hath it.
11. Grief is best pleased with grief's society.
12. Bees gather honey for themselves, and men rob them
9.
of
13.
2.
it.
Napoleon, the man Wellington defeated

died at St. Helena.
at
Waterioo,
LESSON XXXI
THE VERB
1.
2.
A verb is a word
A regular verb
and past
participle
that denotes action or being.

is
one that forms
by adding ed
its
past tense
to the present, in ac-
cordance with the rules of spelling.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
176
An
3.
Irregular
and
past tense
Verb
past
one that does not form
is
by adding ed
participle
to
its
the
present.
4.
to
Transitive
complete
An
5.
its
Verb
meaning.
Intransitive
an object
to
one that requires an object
is
complete
Verb
is
one that does not require
meaning.
its
as, '' I
intransitive has an object
Sometimes a verb
''He ran a race.'' In such sentences, the
dreamed a dream"
usually
verb
transitive.
is
An
Intransitive
called a
"
Freedom
6.
Defective Verb
its
An
as, m?tst, ought,
9.
in all the
modes
quoth, etc.
is
one having more than one
past tense or past participle.
Impersonal Verb
person singular
The
one not used
is
Redundant Verb
form for
8.
exists.''''
and tenses
7.
Verb that does not imply action is sometimes

" The book lies on the shelf."
Examples
Neuter Verb.
is
one used only
as, " It rains "
subject of an impersonal verb
is
in the third
" It snows.''
always
//.
Auxiliary verbs are those used in the conjugation
of other verbs.
They
are do,
be,
have, shall, will, may,
can, must.
Do,
10.
be,
and have are often used as principal verbs.
Finite
Verb
is
any mode or tense of the verb
except the infinitive and the participle.

11.
The
following
list
of
irregular verbs should be
studied until pupils are able to give the principal parts
IRREGULAR VERBS
of all in general use.
Forms
Pres.
little
177
Those marked r are
used are printed in italics
also regular,
1/8
Pres.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
VOICE
Pres.
179
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
l8o
This
is
the definition usually given, and
is
probably correct, but
only transitive verbs can have a passive voice.
Intransitive verbs
have only the active voice.
The Active Voice
3.
shows that the subject denotes the
The
4.
Passive Voice
which
that form of the verb
is
is
actor.
form of a transitive
that
verb which shows that the subject denotes the receive/

of the action.
Many grammarians say that intransitive verbs have no voice,

many others say that they have only the active voice. In
such sentences as " Birds fly,'' and " The boy runs," the subject of
while
the
intransitive
the actor.
verb surely represents
Besides,
For these reasons,
intransitive verbs are active in form.
all
believe
that intransitive verbs have the active voice.
The
5.
Passive Voice of any verb will always con-
of the past participle of
sist
some form
From
this
that verb, preceded
it
follows that the passive of
of any verb will always end with the
all
the
modes and tenses
The past participle

every mode and tense
same word.
is written., and the passive oi write

end with the word written.
oi write
will
by
of the verb be.
in
The form of the verb to be that should be used is the form found
mode and tense called for in the passive verb. Example
The indicative, present-perfect, third, singular of to be is has been ;
in the
therefore, the indicative, present-perfect, third singular, passive of
the verb write
is /las
been written
Sometimes the form of the verb

found the water (to be) frozen."
to be is
"
The
not expressed
as, "
We
knife (that was) found in
the yard belonged to the teacher."
There are two or three exceptions

formation of the passive
hour
is
to
the above rule
thus, the verbs in
He
is
gone,
for
the
and The
come, are in the active voice, although passive in form.
VOICE
6.
Classify these verbs, and

1.
The
bridge has been
verb
2.
is
many
In
i8l
name
built.
the voice of each
(Remember
that a passive
always transitive.)
places,
has
Mississippi
the
overflowed
its
banks.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The greyhound
fifth
7.
8.
7.
can run very rapidly.
Our neighbors are moving into their new house.

Heated air rises.
The Saxons came into England about the middle
of the
century.
The lowing herd winds slowly o'er the lea.

Knowledge must be obtained by hard work.
preceding para~
the
in
graph.
8.
Name
the voice of these verbs
may have seen, may have been

had seen, had been seen, might have
can choose, could choose, shall have been chosen,
shall see,
shall
be seen,
seen, has seen,
seen
choosing, may be choosing, may be

chosen; to have stolen, to have been stolen, having
stolen, having been stolen, stole, is stolen.
to be chosen, are
9.
Change
the voice of
all
the verbs in
tences without changing the meaning

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
these sen-
The
The heavens declare the glory of God.
The address of welcome to the Grand Army of the Republic was given by Henry Watterson.
Such examples incite young men to noble careers.
The philosopher sat in his chair. (Why cannot this be
made passive?)
traveler
was astonished
at the sight.
Health and plenty cheered the laborer.

horse trod on the child's foot.
The sun rose at six.

The book lies on the table.
The commander must attend
to this matter.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
82
LESSON XXXIII
MODE
Mode
1.
the
2.
The
that form or use of the verb which
is
manner
which the action or being
in
3.
The
Mode
used
is
It is also
Potential
liberty, or
used
shows
expressed.
to assert a fact or
in
an
asking questions.
asserts the power, necessity,
possibility of action
may be used
The
Mode
Indicative
actual existence.
is
or being.
This mode
asking questions.
in
sign of the potential
mode
may^ can,
is
?nust, might, could,
wotdd, should.
4.
The Subjunctive Mode
wish, or a supposition; as
As
1.
If
my
2.
If
he be industrious, he
this
mode
asserts an uncertainty, a
brother were here, he would assist me.
is
considered quite
will succeed.
difficult, its
further study will be
found on page 267.

5.
The Imperative Mode
is
used to express a com-
mand, a request, or an entreaty.

6.
Write two sentences

1.
2.
3.
7.
The
The
The
Name
1.
2.
in
which the verb
in
indicative.
potential.
imperative.
the
mode
of
each verb
home.
Can you solve the problem
I
is
wish
were
at
in
these sentences
TENSE
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
"Evangeline" was written by Longfellow.

The czar of Russia was assassinated by Nihilists.
The city could have been captured by a brave army.
Try to learn something new every day.
The laws must be obeyed.
Name
8.
183
all
the passive verbs in the preceding sen-
tences.
9.
10.
Name
the
mode
in
paragraph
7.
of each of these verbs
might throw, was throwing, has thrown, can throw, should

throw, is thrown, have been thrown, had thrown, might
the javelin
if it be thrown
throw the stone
throw
;
had been thrown.
LESSON XXXIV
TENSE, PERSON, AND
1.
Tense
is
NUMBER
that form or use of the verb that
shows
the time of an action or being.

2.
The
Present Tense denotes present time.
3.
The
Present-Perfect Tense expresses
action
or
being as completed at the present time.

4.
The
Past Tense denotes past time.
5.
The
Past-Perfect Tense expresses action or being
as completed at
6.
some past
time.
The Future Tense denotes
future time.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
84
The Future-Perfect Tense
7.
expresses action or be-
ing as completed at some future time.
The
The
indicative
the only
is
mode
that has the six tenses.
potential has only the present, present-perfect, past, and

past-perfect.
The sign of the present is may, can, or must-, of
may
the present-perfect,
have, can have, or must have ; of the past,
might, conld, would, or should; of the past-perfect,

could have, would have, or should have.
The
8.
imperative
Name
is
is
used only in the present.
mode and
the
have,
tnight
tense of these verbs
was written, have written, write, shall have

written, has been written, has written, might write,
can write go, went, might have gone, can have gone,
should go, could have gone, shall go, will go, had gone,
must go, must have gone.
written,
9.
Finite verbs have the
same person and number
as
their subjects.
1.
collective
noun
individuals
are
when
requires a plural verb
thought
when the collection

The committee were
"
is
of,
but
considered
invited,
and
all
singular
as
the
verb
unit; as,
''The
came.''
committee was large."

2.
Two
or
plural
more
verb
subjects
as,
connected
" Industry and
by a7id require a
perseverance are
required."
3.
Two
or
ally
verb
more singular subjects taken separately
connected by
;
as,
or, 7ior, etc.)
" Europe, Asia,
or
(usu-
require a singular
Africa has a greater
population than South America."

4.
Two
more singular subjects preceded by each, every,

as, " Each animal,
plant, and mineral has its use."
When one subject is affirmative and the other negaor
or no require a singular verb
5.
tive,
the verb agrees with the affirmative subject
"The
sailors,
not the captain, are to blame."
captain, not the sailors,
is
to
blame."
"
as,
The
AGREEMENT OF VERB
When
two subjects, taken
there are
differing in
number or person,
nearest subject
as,
*<
daughters are pleased."

the mother
The
first
is
185
separately,
Neither the mother nor the

" Neither the daughters nor
pleased."
four of the preceding rules for the agreement
of the verb apply also to the agreement of the
with
and
the verb agrees with the
its
pronoun
antecedent *
LESSON XXXV
VERB AND SUBJECT
I.
The
verbs and pronouns in these sentences are
Give reasons for the forms used
correct.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Talking and doing are not the same.

Many a man has sad recollections of his youth.
Every train and steamboat was crowded.
From what country is each of your parents?
5.
Every one of the witnesses says the same thing.
6.
Either you or
7.
8.
am
in the
wrong.
box of figs was sent us as a present.

There were more than one of us.
10.
The victuals are cold.

The word victuals is singular.
11.
There are no
12.
Neither wife nor child was there to meet him.

Books, and not pleasure, are his delight.
9.
13.
tidings.
14.
Money,
15.
To
16.
17.
" Very true," say they.

Chaucer's " Canterbury Tales "
18.
These
as well as
men,
is
needed.
possess and to profess are two different things.
variety of pleasing objects
is an old poem.
charms the eye.
are the principal rules for the agreement of a verb.
special rules
and suggestions
will
be given in Part Four.
few
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
l86
19.
Twenty -five
20.
You
The
21.
dollars
Thomas
is
is
not too
much
for a bicycle.
mistaken.
condition of the roads
is
very bad.
23.
Hence arise the following conclusions.

Everybody is very kind to me.
24.
Either he or
22.
2.
or
am
to blame.
following
the
Correct
and
errors,
give your
reasons
(Always be sure you know what words are the subject and prediyou attempt to correct the sentence.
cate before
J
What
studies have each of the boys
Every one of the boys are in their place.

j^Ône of you are wrong.
4. There is one or more reasons for this.
5. Six days'" work have been done.
6^ Either you or, he are responsible.
7. Nothing but vain and foolish pursuits delight some
2.
persons.
8.
The
people, not the government,
responsible for the
is
welfare of the nation.

9^
10.
The number of our days

Between grammar and
are with Thee.

logic there
exists
many
con-
nections.11
" Oats " arc a
12.
The youth
13.
Idleness
i_4.
My
common
noun.
of this country has
many
opportunities.
and ignorance brings sorrow.

brother, with two friends, have arrived.
Strong arguments, not a loud voice, brings conviction.

In him were found neither deceit nor any other vice.
17. Either the horse or the wagon are to be sold.
18. The door of the cell is open, and within stands two
j^.
16.
prisoners.
one of the passions that
never satisfied.
19.
Avarice
20.
The
21.
all her movements there is grace and dignity.

Every house and barn were burned.
Every farmer\s house and barn was burned.
There seems to be disturbance and war in Russia.
is
sun, with
all its
is
planets, are but a small part of the
universe.
22.
23.
24.
In
AGREEMENT OF VERB
187
LESSON XXX VT
VERB AND SUBJECT
Some
1.
ji.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
and some are
of the following are correct
Make
incorrect.
the corrections necessary
More than one
has had a hand in this
affair,
Every one must follow their own views on the question.

Both money and labor were spent on it.
Either you or I are the one who they have selected.
Each of these studies have their own difficulties.
The report of the mayor and clerk were presented.
The report of the mayor and of the clerk was presented.
8.
9.
10.
Not her beauty, but her talents, attract attention.

Her talents, not her beauty, attract attention.
It is her beauty, and not her talents, that attract
at-
tention.
2.
11.
To do
12.
Each day and each hour bring
justly, to love mercy, and to be humble, are duties

of universal obligation.
their portion of duty.
Insert suitable verbs in the following blanks

1.
Not one of
2.
There
3.
Time and
my
neighbor's sons
my
neighbor and her daughter.

for no man.
succeeded in busi-
ness.
3.
has
tide
4.
That able scholar and
5.
The
6.
a valuable library.
critic
crime, not the scaffold,
7.
bushel of pears
Neither he nor I
8.
He
9.
There
or his brother
the shame.
taken from one tree.
frightened.
the book.
been several vessels
lost
on these rocks.
Write two sentences, each having a verb that
1.
2.
Two or more
Two or more
subjects connected by and.

singular subjects connected by or or nor
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
i88
4.
Two
Two
5.
Two
3.
in
by as well as.
number, and taken sepa-
in
person,
singular subjects connected

subjects, differing
rately.
subjects,
differing
and
taken sepa-
rately.
6.
Two
subjects, differing in
number, one affirmative and
the other negative.
LESSON XXX vn
SOME SPECIAL VERBS
SOME SPECIAL VERBS

3.
Fill
3.
4.
5.
Fill
on the
let it
Yes,
table.
here,
it
there.
on his bed a long

The sick man has
now ?
What plans are you
their burdens down ?
Have they
I remember when the cornerstone was
6.
4.
given in paragraph
in the first pair
The book was

Well,
2.
89
each of these blanks with the proper form of
one of the verbs

1.
time.
your head on the pillow.
and
these blanks with the proper forms of the
verbs mentioned in paragraph

1.
Mary, you may
2.
William
the table.
by the stove, but Samuel
is
the
is
old hen.
3.
The
4.
Your coat
5.
6.
The
and
traveler rose early,
out at six o'clock.
well.
yourself
down and
creek
(rising, raising),
is
still.
and the men are
(rising,
raising) that old house.

7.
8.
9.
10.
We
After fighting
ground
5.
6.
of
in the road.
found the knife
Much land has been

The trial was (set, sat)
Use each
all
waste by the high water.

for next
Monday.
down on
day, the soldiers
the
to sleep.
of these
words
in a sentence
lie
lies
lying
lain
lay
lays
laying
laid
sit
sits
sitting
sat
set
sets
setting
rises
raises
rose
raised
rising
Write a sentence containing the past participle
lie.
7.
Write a sentence containing the past tense of
sit.
8.
Write a sentence containing the past tense
of lay.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
ygo
LESSON XXXVIII
CORRECT FORMS OF VERBS
1.
verb,
The
past tense
and the past
never used with an auxiliary
is
participle
is
never used without an
auxiliary (sometimes not expressed).

2.
Choose the right word, and give reasons

He (dene, did) it.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
(se, saw) him.
Have you ever (sw, seen) a giraffe ?

Has he (wrote^- written) the letter ?
The letter ( wro^ written) yesterday was mailed
{That was is understood.)
Has the messenger (come, came) yet ?
The storm soon (began, begun).
The boy said his book was (tore, torn).
,
Some
I
11.
The
13.
of our best apples were (st^^, stolen)
train
him as soon as I (saw, -se^n) him.

had (gone, went) an hour before I (eetrrc;-
came)
This work cannot be (did, done) in one day.
She (ought, ha4-ebt) to go. (As the verb ought has
no past participle, it cannot be used with an auxiliary.)
14.
He was
15.
The
16.
That witness has surely (swore, sworn)
(-ehose,
chosen) umpire of the game.
tune was (sung, -saag) well.

falsely.
Select the right verbs, and give reasons

1.
(think, guess, expect, suppose) that he
3.
how many grains are on

Will you (learn, teach) me to skate ?
4.
Mother,
5.
Try (and,
6.
2.
to-day.
(kncMKcd, knew)
10.
12.
3.
(Guess, think)
will (go,
come)
to see
gone
sick.
this ear of corn.
you next week.
to) learn your lesson.
(expect, think) he has
is
to Europe.
CONJUGATION
7.
191
New York
expected (to be, to have been) in
by
this
time.
He
8.
Remember
(don't, doesn't) believe in hypnotism.
that
Use the
4.
douH can be used only
as a contraction for do not.
past tense and past participle of each of
these verbs in a sentence
throw
see
do
ride
eat
come
break
begin
know
sing
draw
swim
take
blow
go
fly
LESSON XXXIX
CONJUGATION
The
1.
ment
2.
of
conjugation of a verb
voices,
its
The
These
can,
forms are said
On
may,
shall,
could, might, should,
by grammarians to be
they do not express past time.

3.
the orderly arrange-
modes, tenses, persons, and numbers.
auxiliaries
forms for the past
is
and will have

and would.
in the past tense, but
Tense does not always mean time.
the following pages will be found the conjuga-
tion of the verb to be.*
INDICATIVE
MODE
PRESENT TENSE
Plural
Singular
*
tion.
ers,
am,
2.
You
3.
He
are,
is.
2.
3.
We
are,
You are,
They are.
There is a tendency in many schools to neglect the study of conjugaProbably this is the reason why so many students (and many teach-
too) cannot parse a verb correctly.
until the pupil
Conjugation should be studied
can give any voice, mode, or tense called
for.
92
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
PRESENT-PERFECT TENSE
2.
3-
^.^Syv âjc^ô3
CONJUGATION
193
Plural
Singular
1.
2.
3.
may have been,

You may have been,
He may have been.
i.
2.
3.
We
may have been,

You may have been,
They may have been.
PAST TENSE
1.
2.
3.
might be,
You might be,
He might be.
i.
2.
3-
We
might be,
You might be,

They might be.
PAST-PERFECT TENSE
might have been,
1.
2.
You might have
3.
He
i.
been,
We
2.
might have been.
3.
might have been,
You might have been,

They might have been.
IMPERATIVE MODE
PRESENT TENSE
2.
Be, or do thou be.
2.
Be, or do ye or you be.
INFINITIVES
Pre sent- Perfect^ To have been.
Present^ to be.
PARTICIPLES
4.
that
Having been.
Past-Perfect,
Past, Been.
Present, Being.
In the study of conjugation
it
should be observed
I.
In the formation of the futures, we have two auxiliaries,

For the expression of simple futurity,
shall and will.
we use shall in the first person, and will in the second
and third persons, as given

hand, by using will in the
On
in the table.
first
the other
person and shall in the
second and third persons, we express the various ideas

of promise,
be there
''
Lord thy
(i.e., I
command,
obligation, etc.
expresses a promise.
is a command.
make him) expresses
God"
will
sity.
13
"
Thus
Thou
''He
"
will
shalt love the

shall
do it"
obligation or neces-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
[94
2.
The
singular form, thou art, etc.,
is
now used
jnly in
solemn occa:ions. In
addressing one person, we say
the meaning being singular, but
acts of worship, or on other
ordinary discourse, in
yo24.
are, you were, etc.,
the form plural.

3.
In the third person, the subject of the verb
may beany
any of the relative

pronouns, who, which, what, that, etc., or any noun.
For convenience of recitation, only one subject is
of the personal pronouns, he, she,
it,
inserted.
4.
In the potential
mode
the auxiliary
may be
In the present tense, may, can, or must
In the past tense, might, could, would, or shoidd;

In the present-perfect tense, 7nay have, can have, or
mjist
have
In the past-perfect tense, 7night have, could have,
woidd
have, or shoidd have.
LESSON XL
CONJUGATION
I.
Conjugation of the verb Love,
INDICATIVE
in the
MODE
Active Voice.
CONJUGATION
195
PAST TENSE
Singular
Plural
We
loved,
You
He
loved,
You loved,
They loved.
loved,
loved.
PAST-PERFECT TENSE
We
had loved.
You had loved.
He had loved.
I
2.
3-
had loved.
You had loved,

They had loved.
FUTURE TENSE
shall love.
You
He
I.
will love,
2.
will love.
3-
We
shall love.
You will love.

They will love.
FUTURE-PERFECT TENSE
I
shall
You
He
have loved,
will
i.
have loved,
will
2.
have loved.
3.
We
shall
have loved,
You will have loved,

They will have loved.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE
PRESENT TENSE
If
love,
1.
If
we
If
you love.
2.
If
you
If
he love.
3.
If they love.
love,
love,
POTENTIAL MODE
PRESENT TENSE
may love,
You may love,
He may love.
1.
2.
3.
We
may love,
You may love,
They may love.
PRESExNTT-PERFECT TENSE
I may have loved.
You may have loved,
He may have loved.
We
may have loved,

You may have loved,
They may have loved.
PAST TENSE
might love.
You might love.
He might love.
I
We might
love,
You might love.

They might love.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
196
PAST-PERFECT TENSE
Plural
Singular
might have loved,
2.
You might have
3.
He
loved,
We
You might have loved,

They might have loved.
2.
might have loved.
might have loved,
3.
IMPERATIVE MODE
PRESENT TENSE
2.
Love, or love thou.
Love, or love you.
2.
INFINITIVES
Present^
To
Present-Perfect^
love.
To have
loved.
PARTICIPLES
Past, Loved.
Present, Loving.
2.
Past Perfect, Having loved.
Conjugation of the verb Love,
in
the
Passive
Voice.
INDICATIVE
MODE
PRESENT TENSE
Plural
Singular
am
loved,
1.
2.
You
are loved,
3.
He
loved.
is
i.
2.
3.
We
are loved,
You are loved,

They are loved.
2.
have been loved,

You have been loved,
2.
3.
He
3.
1.
i.
has been loved.
We
have been loved,
You have been loved,

They have been loved.
PAST TENSE
1.
2.
3.
was loved,
You were loved,
He was loved.
I
i.
2.
3-
We
were loved,
You were loved,

They were loved.
PAST-PERFECT TENSE
1.
2.
3.
had been /oved,

You had been loved,
He had been loved.
I
i.
2.
3.
We
had been loved,
You had been loved,

They had been loved.
CONJUGATION
197
FUTURE TENSE
Plural
Singular
1.
be loved,
shall
2.
You
3.
He
1.
2.
You
3.
He
will
be loved,
shall be loved,
You will be loved,

They will be loved.
2.
be loved.
will
We
i.
3.
FUTURE-PERFECT TENSE
shall
have been loved,
will
will
We
i.
have been loved,
have been loved.
shall
have been loved,
You will have been

They will have been
2.
3.
loved,
loved.
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE
PRESENT TENSE
1.
If
2.
If
3.
If
be loved,
you be loved,
he be loved.
I
i.
If
we be
2.
If
you be loved,
3.
If they be loved.
loved,
PAST TENSE
1.
If
2.
If
3.
were loved, or were
i.
If
2.
If
we were loved,
you were loved,
3.
If
they v/ere loved.
loved,
you were loved, or were you loved,

If he were loved, or were he loved.
POTENTIAL MODE
PRESENT TENSE
3.
may be loved,
You may be loved,
He may be loved.
1.
1.
2.
i.
2.
3.
We
may be loved,
You may be loved,
They may be loved.
2.
3.
may have been loved,

You may have been loved,
He may have been loved.
i.
2.
3.
We
may have been loved,

You may have been loved,
They may have been loved.
PAST TENSE
might be loved,
1.
2.
You might be
3.
He might be
1.
loved,
loved.
i.
2.
3.
We
might be loved,
You might be loved,

They might be loved.
PAST-PERFECT TENSE
2.
3.
might have been loved,

You might have been loved,
He might have been loved.
i.
2.
3.
We
might have been loved,
You might have been loved,

They might have been loved.
198
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
IMPERATIVE MODE
PRESENT TENSE
Plural
Singular
2.
Be
loved,
07'
be thou loved.
Be
2.
loved, or be you loved.
INFINITIVES
Present,
To
Present-Perfect,
be loved.
To
have been loved.
PARTICIPLES
Present
Past
Being loved.
Loved.
of
3.
The
its
voices,
The
is the orderly arrangement

modes, and tenses in one person and num-
first
person, singular).
conjugations already given are of the ComThere are two other forms the Progress-
mon Form.
ive
loved.
synopsis of a verb
ber (usually the

4.
Past-Perfect
Having been
and the Emphatic.
5.
The
Progressive
Form
of the verb
represents the action as in progress
that
is
as, " I
which
am
writ-
ing."
made by
1.
The Progressive Form
2.
present participle the various modes, tenses,

persons, and numbers of the verb to be.
Since the progressive form always ends with the present
before
of any verb
is
placing
its
participle
participle,
and the passive always ends with the past

follows that the progressive form is
it
always in the active voice.

6.
The Emphatic Form
the assertion
is
of the verb
expressed with
is
which
as "I do
that in
emphasis
write."
1
The Emphatic Form
is
made by
prefixing the present
or past tense of do to the simple form of the verb.

2.
This form
is
used in the present and past indicative, and

active voice, and in the im-
the present subjunctive,

perative, both active
3.
The emphatic form is

"Does he write.?"
and
passive.
often used in asking questions
as,
WRITTEN REVIEW
199
LESSON XL!
REVIEW
1.
Write
a synopsis of the verb
see,
progressive
form.
2.
3.
mon
4.
Write a synopsis of the verb see, emphatic form.

Write the conjugation of choose, active voice, comform.
Write the conjugation of
common
choose,
passive voice,
form.
LESSON XLII
WRITTEN REVIEW
Write a sentence having a verb
in the
2.
Active, indicative, present-perfect.

Active, indicative, future-perfect.
1.
3.
Passive, indicative, past-perfect.
4.
Passive, indicative, past.
5.
Active, potential, past.
6.
7.
Active, potential, past-perfect.

Active, potential, present-perfect.
8.
Passive, potential, past.
9.
Passive, potential, present.
10.
Active, imperative.
11.
Passive, imperative.
12.
Active, subjunctive, present.
13.
Passive, subjunctive, present.
14.
Passive, subjunctive, past.

Active, indicative, past, progressive form.
Active, indicative, present, emphatic form.
Active, potential, past, progressive form.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Active, indicative, present-perfect, progressive form.

Active, imperative, progressive form.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
200
>
LESSON
XLIII
THE INFINITIVES
The
1.
form
infinitive is that
presses action or being without affirming

to
have written
The
2.
it
as, to write^
to exist.
following are the infinitives of the verb see
Active
to see,
Passive
to
Present-Perfect
Present
The
which ex-
of the verb
be seen,
infinitive has the progressive
to
have seen.
to
have been seen.
forms
to be seehig
and
have
to
been seeing.
Of
course an intransitive verb has but the two active infini-
tives.
The names present and present-perfect do
not have reference to
the time expressed by the infinitive, but to
depends on the
The
finite
form.
its
The
time
verb of the sentence.
sign of the infinitive
is
to.
This sign
omitted after the
is
as,
verbs bid^ dare, feel, hear, help, let, make, see, and some others
" See the birds fly:'
" Let him coine.''
When to is omitted, it
;
should be suppHed in parsing.

3.
The
used as a noun, an adjective, or
infinitive is
an adverb.
4.
The
1.
following
is
*'To work
the order for parsing an infinitive

not always
is.
intransitive,
verb, regular,
ent
it
"The
infinitive,
is
pres-
is.
To
lesson to be learned was very difficult."
learned
tive,
active
To work
has the construction of a noun, nominative,
subject of the verb

2.
pleasant."
is
a verb, regular, transitive, passive
present
modifying
it
lesson.
be
infini-
has the construction of an adjective,
THE INFINITIVE
"He
3.
went
a
is
school
to
transitive,
active
infinitive,
the construction of an
Construction means the
has
it
modifying went.
present
To study
study grammar."
to
regular,
verb,
20I
adverb,
same as
office.
5.
In the following sentences the infinitive has the
construction of a
As
b.
As
3.
object of a verb.
like to
a.
b.
The
As
walk.
thief desires to escape.
attribute
complement
To see is to believe.
To study is to learn.
a.
b.
4.
In apposition with subject

a. It is useless to inquire.
5.
As
It is
b.
a sin to speak deceitfully.
object of a preposition
was about to write.*

They had no choice but
a.
b.
6.
To learn requires application.

To clijnb trees is dangerous.
a.
2.
noun
subject
to go.
construction of an adjective
1.
Not
used in the predicate
from the wrath to come.

Leaves have their time to fall.
a. Flee
b.
2.
Used
a.
b.
7.
in the predicate (attribute
The house is to be sold.

The governor's authority
to be supported.
construction of an adverb
I
Modifying a verb
a. Music was ordained to refresh the mind.
b. They fought to defetid their country.
* In such sentences, about
same
is
complement)
as ready or prepared.
may be called an adjective, meaning nearly the

The infinitive, then, would have the construc-
tion of an adverb, modifying about.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
202
Modifying an adjective
a. These apples are good to eat.
b. The industrious boy is anxious
2.
Modifying an adverb
3.
a.
He
b.
It is ripe
is
enough
is
marked
A model
{To eat modifies enough.
to eat.
an adverb, modifying
Parse the infinitives in
tences
work.
too young to enlist (modifies too^.
Enough
8.
to
all
ripe.')
of the preceding sen-
a.
for written parsing
can easily be arranged by teacher or
pupil.
9.
Write the
lie, sit,
infinitives of these
verbs
choose, tear, do.
LESSON XLIV
INFINITIVES
I.
Point out the infinitives in these sentences, and
give the construction of each
3.
They had the good fortune to escape.

The student has a license to preach.
The cuckoo tried to steal the nest.
4.
She
5.
1.
2.
is
sad to see her sister faihng.
have come to hear you sing.
6.
You have
7.
8.
10.
You were kind enough to aid.

These men were sent to rule a
He is old enough to vote.
11.
The
12.
Not to save my right hand would

I come not here to talk.
9.
13.
am
a problem to solve.
prepared to hear you.

distant province.
pupil forgot to study his lesson.

I
do
it.
THE INFINITIVE
It is
14.
useless to inquire.
to inquire.
It
To obey
16.
It is
To
To
is
useless
better than to be punished.
better to strive
wrong
18.
is
(I)
15.
17.
203
right than to rail at the
for the
good)
hesitate is to be
lost.
rob a caravan
a crime, but to steal a continent
(is
is
is
glory.
Every one should
19.
strive to
be an ornament to his pro-
fession.
One stumble
20.
honorable
2.
is
enough
to deface the character of
an
life.
LESSON XLV
REVIEW OF THE INFINITIVE
1.
Usually, no word should
the verb
thus,
*'
to rapidly
come between
walk
"
should be
to
" to
and
walk
rapidly."
Some
2.
authors do not hesitate to disregard the above rule.
The
present-perfect infinitive should not be used
after verbs of wis/mig, expecting, etc.
say
*'
He
wished
to
have gone,
"
go3.
Write a sentence having

1.
2.
An
An
infinitive, present, active.

infinitive, present, passive.
but
We
"
He
should not
wished to
:
.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
204
An
An
An
3.
4.
5.
Write
4.
infinitive, present-perfect, active.

infinitive, present-perfect, passive.
infinitive
without
a sentence
to.
having an
infinitive
with the
construction of
An adjective,
An adjective,
2.
A
A
A
A
A
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
not in the predicate.

in the predicate.
noun, subject.
noun, object.
noun, attribute complement.
noun, object of a preposition.
noun, in apposition with a subject.
An adverb, modifying a verb.

An adverb, modifying an adjective.
An adverb, modifying an adverb.
8.
9.
10.
LESSON XL VI
THE PARTICIPLE
Participle
is
word derived from a
ing of the properties of
a verb and
verb, partak-
of an adjective or a
noun.
There are three
2.
participles
the Present, the Past,
and the Past-Perfect.

Past is sometimes called the Perfect, and the Past-Perfect
sometimes called the Compound Participle.
The
is
3.
The
following are the participles of the transitive
verb see
Present
Active
Passive
An
seeing,
being seen,
Past
Past-Perfect
seen,
having seen.
seen,
having been seen.
intransitive verb has only the three active participles.
THE PARTICIPLE
Some grammarians do
205
past participle in the
not consider the
active voice a separate participle, because
it
has the same form as
the past participle in the passive voice. While it is true that they
have the same form, there is often quite a difference in meaning.
The active participle is used with an auxiliary in forming many of

''
I have seen the parade,"
the tenses in the active voice thus, in
have is the auxiliary and seen is the past participle, active. In " I
have been seen," have bee7i is the auxiliary and seen is the past parti;
In "
ciple, passive.
seen
is
4.
the mountain
The animal seen on
was a bear,"
the past participle, passive.
Write
all
the participles of these verbs
write, choose, walk, go, do, try, sit.
5.
always has the construction of
participle
an
adjective or a noun.
No word is a participle unless it is derived from a verb thus, in

He was unknown in the community," unknown is not a participle,
;
"
because there
6.
The
is
no verb unknow from which
following
"The
1.
is
learned
and modifies
"By
verb,
is
participle, past
2.
it
yesterday
regular,
was
not
transitive,
recited."
passive;
has the construction of an adjective,
lesson.
learning the lesson he
won
the approval of his
a verb, regular, transitive,

it has the construction of
participle, present
teacher."
active
can be derived.
the order for parsing a participle
lesson
Learned
it
Learning
is
a noun, the object of the preposition by.
7.
In the following sentences the participle has the
construction of an adjective
I
Not used in the predicate

a. Wealth obtained dishonestly soon disappears.
is tired.
b. Having walked 2. long distance, the soldier
:
c.
The policeman found

bushes.
the criminal concealed in the
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
2o6
2.
Used
a.
b.
c.
8.
as attribute
Truth
lies
complement
wrapped up and hidden
Cincinnatus was found plowing.

The general lay wotmded on the
in a well.
field.
In the following sentences the participle has the
construction of a noun
1.
2.
In the nominative case
good
a.
Riding a bicycle
is
b.
This reirinding
me
c.
me.
My admitting the
exercise.
of your kindness
is
fact will not affect the
repj'oving
argument.
In the objective case

obtain information by reading good books.
a.
b. Light minds undertake many things without com:
We
pleting them.
c.
9.
He
could not resist taking the apple.
Parse the participles in the preceding sentences.
LESSON XLVII
THE PARTICIPLE
I.
Point out the participles in these sentences, and
give the construction of each

1.
2.
like to read.
Pardon my
Avoid keeping company with the depraved.
asking
if
you
5.
The Indians ran screaming in pursuit.

Many have amassed wealth by living economically.
Attempting much and doing little is a common cause
6.
Pocahontas was married to an Englishman named John
7.
The
8.
Instead of
3.
4.
of
failure.
Rolfe.
philosopher sat buried in thought.
reasoning more forcibly, he
talked
loudly.
9.
Our united
efforts
could not prevent his going.
more
THE PARTICIPLE
10.
He
spent hours
in
correcting
20/
and polishing a single
couplet.
best conquered by obeying her.
11.
Nature
12.
The
13.
14.
an adjective in the predicate.)

The pardon of the governor prevented his being hung.
God's balance, watched by angels, is hung across the
15.
The
is
child stood weeping.
has the construc-
(^F<?.?//;/^
tion of
sky.
yesterday has been mailed.
letter written
placed before nouns to de-
Participles are often
2.
scribe
some condition
become simple
1.
The
or
They then
characteristic.
adjectives.
engineer,
iiijured in the wreck,
was taken home.
(Participle.)
3.
The injured vm.n was taken away. (Adjective.)

The horse, running rapidly, soon reached the opposite
4.
The rummtg
2.
side of the field.
3.
Use each
as an adjective
words
of these
;
(Participle.)
horse was soon captured.
in
(Adjective.)
two sentences
second, as a participle.
wounded, chosen,
stolen, rippling, polished, sworn.
LESSON XL VIII
DIAGRAMS
I.

I.
The
soldier lay
wounded.
(^
soldier
lay
wounded,
The
I
2.
We
We
I
should avoid injuring the feelings of others.
should avoid
mjunng
feelings.
I
first,
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
208
3.
Your writing
that letter so neatly secured the situation.
wntinof
Your
neatly
letter
so
that
j
secured
situation.
The
participial
4.
We
phrase
is
the subject of secured.
can improve our minds by reading good books.
reading
^^
books.
Reading
a participle used as the object oiby^ and books
is
is
the
object of reading.
5.
The pardon
pardon
of the governor prevented his being hung.
prevented
[
being hung.
his
Being hung
is
a participle, with the construction of a noun,
object oi prevented.
6.
Pardon
my
asking
if
you
like to read.
if
Pardon
REVIEW
209
LESSON XLIX
WRITTEN REVIEW OF PARTICIPLES
1.
Write a sentence having a participle

1.
2.
3.
4.
With
With the construction of a noun,
the construction of a noun, subject.

object of a verb.
object of a preposition.
object of a verb,
and
having an object.
5.
With
an
6.
With
the construction of a noun, subject, and having

object.
the
construction
of an
adjective, not attribute
complement.
7.
With the construction of an
adjective, attribute comple-
ment.
2.
Diagram the sentences you have
written.
LESSON L
WRITTEN REVIEW OF INFINITIVES AND
PARTICIPLES
I.
tences
Parse the infinitives and participles in these sen:
1.
2.
3.
Learn to labor and to wait.

impossible to advance rapidly.
It is
He
dislikes
being falsely accused.
5.
John Brown's body lies moldering in the tomb.

We expected him to come. (The object of expected is
him to come. To come has the construction of an
6.
7.
8.
4.
adjective,
know him
modifying hivi.')
to be an honest man.
was opposed to his teaching the class.

{Him is not the object of
heard him reproved.
heard.^
14
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
2IO
9.
heard him recite the lesson.

is to be blamed for keeping us waiting so long.
He
10.
{
to
be blamed
is
us
He
waiting:
long-
keeping
To
be is
so
understood before waiting, forming the progressive form
of the present infinitive.
2.
11.
His having
12.
His desire
failed
is
not surprising.
to teach is gratified.
Diagram the preceding
sentences.
LESSON LI
ANALYSIS AND DIAGRAMING
Analyze and diagram these sentences
1.
ourselves what
make
not always easy to
It is
we wish
to be.
2.
Many
persons think
it
is
not wrong to
to escape
lie
punishment.
3.
We
4.
are commanded to love our

know how to write a letter.
5.
To obey
6.
Hope comes with
7.
We
8.
By doing
9.
10.
11.
He
is
better than to be punished.
smiles the hour of pain to cheer.
feel the earth
could
enemies.
nothing,
we
tremble beneath our
learn to do
feet.
ill.
soon began to be weary of having nothing to do.
By endeavoring to
The teacher being
school
please
all,
we
sick, school
fail
to please any.
was dismissed.
was dismissed.
I
teacher
The
[being
sick
The
tence.
phrase, teacher being sick, has no connection with the senTeacher is in the nominative case (nominative absolute).
THE ADVERB
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
The
211
jury having been sworn, the
trial
proceeded.
Our lessons having been recited, we came home.

Having recited our lessons, we came home.
Hope deferred maketh the heart sick.
The rain having ceased, we saw a rainbow.
To see you here on such a day surprises me.
LESSON
LIT
THE ADVERB
1
An
adverb
is
word used
to
modify a verb, an
adjective, or an adverb.
2.
According
are divided
to their office in the sentence,
into three classes
adverbs
Simple, Interrogative,
and Conjunctive.
3.
which
Simple Adverb simply modifies the word with
it is
as
He
2.
The mountain
An
4.
used
reads well and writes very well.

exceedingly high.
is
Interrogative
Adverb
is
one used
in
asking a
question.
5.
in a
Conjunctive Adverb
one that modifies a word
is
dependent clause, and
also
connects that clause
with the independent clause.

In the sentence,
''
will
recite
when
the time comes,"
when
modifies cojnes and connects the adverb clause with will recite.
The
principal
conjunctive
adverbs are when., where., as, why,
wherein, whereby, while, whenever, whereon, and than.

It
is
evident that conjunctive adverbs are found in complex
sentences.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
212
6.
Such adverbs as surely yperJiaps^
certainly, yes, nay^
and not are sometimes called Modal Adverbs.
no,
Notice that a modal adverb is not an adverb of manner. A

modal adverb describes the manner of making the assertion, not
the manner of performing the action.
In " He will certainly come quicldy," certamly is a modal adverb,
describing the manner in which the assertion is made, and quickly
is an adverb of manner, describing how the action will be performed.
7.
According
meaning adverbs are divided
to their
as follows
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Adverbs
Adverbs
Adverbs
Adverbs
Adverbs
Adverbs
Adverbs
of Place
where, here, etc.
as,
Time
of Number
of Manner
of
now, again, afterward,
-as,,
of Degree
as,
how, well,
as, very, too,
^\.z.
as, 07ice, twice, secondly, thirdly.

so, etc.
much,
etc.
why, wherefore, etc.

of Affirmation and Negation; 2is, yes,
of Cause
as,
no, yea,
nay, etc.
8.
The
only modification of adverbs
They have
is
comparison.
the same degrees as adjectives, but usually
only adverbs of manner can be compared.

9.
Classify the adverbs in these sentences according
to use
and according
Tarry
On my way
4.
hither, I saw her come forth.

There were no other persons there.*
They hved together very happily.
3.
The
meaning
he comes.
1.
2.
till
to
5.
How
6.
Perchance you are the man.
rapidly the
moments
have not seen him since
7.
8.
Whither has he gone?
9.
How
first
there
far that little
is
fly!
returned.
candle throws
not an adverb;
it is
its
beams!
simply an introductory word.
;:
THE ADVERB
213
Slowly and sadly we laid him down.

These scenes, once so delightful, no longer please him.
Having duly arranged his affairs, he departed imme-
10.
11.
12.
diately.
adverbs are composed of two or more
Many
10.
and
words
called
Phrase Adverbs.
by
as,
one by one, at
by,
all.
These may be
Notice the difference between a phrase adverb and an adverb

phrase.
11.
Only one negative should be used
in
making
denial.
"
12.
has never done nothing " should be " He has never

done anything," or " He has done nothing."
He
for adjectives, nor
Adverbs should not be used
adjectives for adverbs.

In the sentence, "
disagreeable
is
The day
is
disagreeable cold," the adjective
used instead of the adverb disagreeably.
In "This pen does not write good," the adjective good

instead of the adverb well.
may be an
well, better, best
the intention
feeling.
{Good,
adverb.)
best
Therefore, the adjective
<5^rt^
used
is
to express the queen's condition, not her
is
is
an adjective;
In " The queen feels badly,"
better,
manner of
should be used instead of the
adverb badly.
13.
Some
adjectives,
when used
in the predicate to
express the condition of the subject, are incorrectly
The
called adverbs.
following sentences are
1.
She looks
2.
Velvet feels smooth.
3.
4.
5.
He
all
correct
cold.
sat silent.
The
The
lady feels bad.
author stood bareheaded in the presence of the
king.
Bareheaded
it
does not
tell
is
the
an adjective, expressing the condition of author

manner in which he stood.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
214
LESSON LIII
THE ADVERB
1.
Correct where necessary, and give your reasons
for the changes
1.
He
2.
Speak more
3.
4.
How
5.
The sun
shines brightly and the grass looks greenly.
6.
He
very sadly about his loss.
7.
8.
stood, silently
and alone.
distinctly.
miser never gives anything to nobody.

sweetly the music sounds.
feels
The teacher was tolerable

The young lady looked
well informed.
beautiful\y,
and she
sang
beautiful.
9.
We
arrived at
ID.
The
bashful
11.
This apple looks well (good
12.
She dresses suitable to her station and means.

I was exceeding glad to hear from you.
13.
14.
15.
16.
2.
home safety and soundly.

young man appeared very awkwardfy.
t ),
but
it
tastes bad.
The train doesn't wait for no one.

The doctor said she would never be jrlo better.
Every man cannjpt afford to keep a coach.
Choose the right word, and give reasons

1.
He looked (glad, gladly) when his brother
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Lucy
felt
very (sad, sadly)
when her
came.
friend died.
The evening bells sound (sweety- sweetly) and

The eggs were boiled (soft, softly).
The house was made (strong, strongly).
Come
low.
(quick, quickly).
10.
The slaves were treated (harsh^ harshly).

The singer's voice seemed (harsh; harshly).
The moon rose (clear, clearly).
The house appears (comfortable, comfortably) and
11.
The boy was dressed
7.
8.
9.
(pleasant, pleasantly).
(comfortable, comfortably).
POSITION OF THE ADVERB
215
LESSON LIV
POSITION OF THE ADVERB
1.
Adverbs should be so placed
that there can be no
doubt as to what they are intended to modify.

these sentences, and explain the
The
The
3.
Improve the location of the adverb
tences
Notice
of each
Only the address can be written on this

address can only be written on this
address can be written on this side
1.
2.
2.
meaning
side.
side.
only.
in these sen-
1.
We
2.
All
3.
All that glitters
4.
Two young
only recite three lessons a day.
men
are not educated.

is
not gold.
ladies
came
to the
party nearly dressed
alike.
5.
6.
7.
Such prices are only paid in times of great scarcity.

Corn should be generally planted in April or May.
No man has ever so much that he does not want more.
shall be glad to see
8.
9.
The work
10.
11.
The
action,
3.
you always.
be never completed.
Having nearly lost a thousand dollars by the transwill
cannot afford to venture again.
secretary was expected to resign daily.
12.
He
13.
14.
We
15.
The Chinese
16.
nearly walked ten miles.
only bring forward a few things.
merely speak of ourselves.

chiefly live
upon
rice.
only ate one apple to-day.

1.
2.
A modal adverb.
An adverb of manner.
4.
A conjunctive adverb
A phrase adverb.
5.
An
3.
adverb phrase.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
2l6
LESSON LV
THE PREPOSITION
of
1.
its
object to
Some
account
Preposition
prepositions are
means
by
of,
a word that shows the relation
is
some other word

of,
in the sentence.
composed of two or three words
from
under,
Prepositions are sometimes used as part of a verb
laughed
''This matter must be attended
:/.'"
as,
on
etc.
/c."
as, " He was

Such verbs are
;
Compou7id Verbs.
called
Some
words, originally participles, are sometimes prepositions
The
2.
regarding, respecting.
as, conceriiing,
object
of
preposition
may be
a word,
phrase, or clause.
I.
The Esquimaux
1.
He
3.
is
about
live in
huts
made oi snow.
to returrt.
The wind had ceased before the rain began to fall.

(Some authors call before a conjunctive adverb in this
sentence.)
When
3.
preposition has
no object,
either an adverb or an adjective;

1.
2.
it
becomes
as
The days are passing (5/. (Adverb.)

The sentence above is correct. (Adjective.)
4. The preposition usually precedes its object.

When the object is the relative that, it always precedes the preposition
as,
" This
is
the
man
that
spoke to."
Frequently in interrogative sentences the preposition
is
placed
end of the sentence; as, "What are we coming to?''

"Whom did he give it to? " This form is much better than " To
what are we coming? " or " To whom did he give it? "
We have many other examples of good English in which the
at
the
THE PREPOSITION
preposition
is
think about
From
made, "
tence,"
5.
placed at the end
is
as,
house to
live in
subject to
practice which no one objected to.
the preceding
21/
will
it
be seen that the statement frequently
preposition should never be used at the end of a sen-
not sanctioned by good English.
Care must be taken
to use appropriate preposi-
tions.
Between
two objects, and a?iiong
refers to
refers to
more than
two objects.
Observe the difference

into the house "
in
"
meaning between / 3.ndmto.
He walks
means
that he walks from the outside into the inside.

in the house " means that he is in the house, walking around.
"Hewalks
In some grammars a long list of words is given, arranged alphabetically, each word followed by a preposition supposed to be
appropriate but as the same word may have more than one appropriate preposition, and as the selection of the proper one depends
;
on the meaning intended
to be conveyed,
it
seems
only way to learn to use prepositions correctly
me
to
is
to
that the
study the
language of good writers and speakers.

6.
Correct the errors in these sentences

1
The sultry evening was followed with a heavy
:
frost.
2.
He
3.
6.
Our government is based in the rights of the people.

He was accused with robbery.
This work is different to that.
There is a constant rivalry between these four rail-
7.
Divide the apples
8.
He was
He was
4.
5.
fell
from the bridge in the water.
roads.
9.
10.
among
the two girls.
eager of studying grammar.

desirous for studying Latin.
Battles are fought with
other weapons besides pop-
guns.
7.
11.
The band was
12.
Raise your book (q^,
Fill
followed with a large crowd.

of, off
of the
~)
table.
each of these blanks with a proper preposition
He
2.
poured the water

the barrel.
We saw you
the concert.
3.
The
1.
prisoner
is
accused
stealing a horse.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
2i8
what I say.
You may rely
wild animals.
The forests abound
preparation.
There is much need
(Use of between
consumption.
The man died
the verb died and the name of the disease.)
corn.
The soil is adapted
money.
The merchant is in want
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
He
10.
school
stays
late.
LESSON L VI
THE CONJUNCTION
1.
Conjunction
a word used to connect words,
is
phrases, and clauses.

Sometimes a conjunction is used simply as an introductory word.
He went out as captain," as is not a connective. Sometimes a
conjunction is introductory to an entire sentence, but in such cases
In "
a preceding clause
Some
if,
is
often understood.
conjunctions are composed of two or more words
as well as, in order that,
According
into two classes
to
2.
3.
as,
as
etc.
their
use conjunctions are divided
Coordinate and Subordinate.
Coordinate Conjunction
is
one that connects
elements of equal rank.

1
Copulatives simply couple or join
as, both, atid,
more-
over, etc.
2.
Alternatives (disjunctives) denote separation, or a choice
3.
between two as, or, either, neither, nor, etc.

Adversatives denote something opposed or adverse to
what has been said as, but, still, yet, however, not;
withstanding,
4.
etc.
as, therefore,
/natives denote effect or consequence
wherefore, hence, consequently, accordingly, so that,
;
thus, then, etc.
..
THE CONJUNCTION
4.
The words,
219
phrases, or clauses connected by a co-
ordinate conjunction should be similar in form.

1.
He
good and wise;
is
He
not,
good and
is
of
full
wisdom.
2.
He came
cheerfully and promptly

and with promptness.
Did they go skating, or riding
not,
He came
cheer-
fully
3.
skating, or to ride
5.
Did they go
not,
Improve these sentences

1.
He did not remain to pray,
:
2.
but for scoffing.

Like signs give plus, but unlike signs will produce
minus.
3.
They
4.
5.
lived together in peace and quietly.

Thanking you for your kindness, and I hope to hear
from you soon, I am yours truly.
Great and full of power art thou, O Lord
Faithfully and with earnestness he tried to perform
!
6.
the task.
6.
Subordinate Conjunction
is
one that connects
elements of unequal rank.
A
tence,
7.
subordinate conjunction
and
is
always found in a complex sen-
joins the dependent clause to the independent clause.
According
to the
meaning
of the dependent clause,
subordinate conjunctions are divided into those of

1
Time
2.
Reason or Cause
as, as, until, since, etc.

;
as, because,
for, since, as, inasmuch
as, etc.
3.
Condition or Siippositioji
cept,
8.
as, if, pi'ovided, unless,
notwithstanding, whether,
4.
Etid or Purpose ;
Concession
6.
Comparison
as,
;
as, that, in
1.
2.
An
order that,
though, although.
as, than.

copulative conjunction.
adversative conjunction.
etc.
lest.
ex
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
220
3.
An
4.
Alternative conjunctions.
illative
conjunction.
A subordinate
A subordinate
A subordinate
5.
6.
7.
conjunction of time.
conjunction of purpose.
conjunction of concession.
LESSON L VII
CORRELATIVES
1.
conjunctions, a conjunction and an adverb,
Two
or two adverbs are often used in pairs.
The
called Coriêlatives.
correlatives
They
are then
following are the principal
Neither
nor.
Either or.
It
neither rains nor snows.
Either Spain or Cuba
is
to
blame.
and. She both reads and writes.

Both
Though he was rich, yet he was a miser.
yet.
Though
As as. He is as tall as I am.
As so. As he thinks, so he speaks.
asShe is not so wise as her sister.

So
The lesson is so long that I cannot get it.
that.
So
Whether he goes or remains is uncertain.
or.
Whether
Not
only
but
also.
The
climate,
is
not only healthful,
but also pleasant.
As
some
They should be parsed as
as well as, but likewise, notwithstanding that, and
if,
other combinations, are not correlatives.
one word.
2.
tives,
Care should be taken
and
to
to select appropriate correla-
place them where they belong.
Correct the following

1
2.
He
will neither go or send any one.

Nothing either strange or interesting occurred.
CORRELATIVES
3.
He was
221
not only considered a statesman, but also an
orator.
4.
Both he works and plays.
works
r
He
'
plays
7.
not only visited New York, but also Philadelphia.

Though he has a bad reputation, so I will trust him.
He was as angry that he could not speak.
8.
Wood
5.
6.
9.
10.
He
(So and as are the

is not as durable as iron.
proper correlatives in negative sentences.)
Is this as
He
is
good
as that
not qualified for either teaching mathematics or
language.
shall neither
11.
12.
Some nouns
depend on you nor on him.

are
used in the singular or the
either
plural.
13.
3.
Gold
is
both found in California and Colorado.
The Comparative Degree, and
words
the
ot/ier,
and otherwise, are generally followed, by
rather, else,
than.
4.

1.
Gold
2.
is
heavier, but not so useful as iron.
never have and never
will vote for
such a man.
sentence means, "Gold is heavier as iron, but not so

This is incorrect, because as should not follow the
comparative heavier. The sentence should read, " Gold is heavier
than iron, but not so useful."
The second sentence means, " I never have vote and never will
vote for such a man." This is incorrect, because the past participle
The sentence should read,
voted should be used with have.
The
first
useful as iron."
"
never have voted for such a man, and never will."

5.
Correct the errors in these sentences

1.
2.
3.
February is not so long, but colder, than March.

February is colder but not so long, as March.
I always have, and always will be, an early riser.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
222
He
ought and will go this evening.

Napoleon could not do otherwise but to retreat.
The visitor was no other but the Colonel.
That house is preferable and cheaper than the other.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Such behavior is nothing else except disgraceful.

This is different but better than the old.
The artist went and remained in Italy a year.
8.
9.
10.
6,
Use each
sentence
both
and,
whether
as
pair of the following correlatives in a
such
either
as
as,
so
so
yet,
so,
not only
as,
neither
or,
though
or,
LESSON
nor,
that,
as,
but also.
LVIII
THE INTERJECTION
An
1.
Interjection
is
word used
to
denote strong
feeling or emotion.
Interjections have
no grammatical construction.
Words from almost any other part of speech may become

as, J/y stars I What I Weill
jections
inter-
is
generally used before words of address, and oh before words
expressing emotion
2.
as
Great and manifold are thy works,
2.
Oh! how can
Lord
go?
Interjections are generally followed by the excla-
mation point.
strong feeling, or
If
if
whole expression, a
the
interjection
does not express
the feehng continues through the
comma
is
usually placed after the

and the exclamation point
interjection,
is
223
placed at the
end.
The exclamation
3.
point should not be used after O.
Parse the adverbs and
Analyze these sentences.
conjunctions
1.
2.
3.
She did not go
4.
This
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
{Both
The fact that he is an American needs no

You cannot tell where he has gone.
is
to school until she
the time
when snow
proof.
was ten years
old.
falls.
The bells rang and the whistles blew.

Love is sunshine, but hate is shadow.
Be wiser to-day than yesterday.
Childhood shows the man, as morning shows the day.
He is both wise and virtuous.
and should be
taken together, and parsed as a strengthened
conjunction, connecting wise and virtuotis.)

4.
in
paragraph
3.
LESSON LIX
Analyze these sentences, and parse the pronouns,
verbs, participles, and infinitives
dreamed that Greece might still be free.

it on your heart, that every day is the best day
1.
2.
Write
in
the year.
3.
That people are good
4.
Time misspent
5.
For a time the Puritans kept unbroken the plan of a
6.
Good
is
in the main, is a true statement.
not lived, but
lost.
religious State.
conversation
is
gaining knowledge.
the most
delightful
method of
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
224
8.
a mission to go into every corner and reconquer

unhappy world for God.
Men with no prejudice and a great brain are the men to
9.
A man
7.
Life
is
this
govern the world.
Remember
tha7i,
shorter
is
when
that
when he
the
is
walking than when
comparative degree
the positive degree of the
same word
is
is
at rest.
followed by
either expressed or
understood.
and the useful metals are found in any region,

manufacturing interests will sooner or later be de-
10.
If coal
11.
There are some schools whose course of study provides
12.
When
13.
Recollect that
14.
There
veloped.
for but little study of English.
tion
faith is lost,
is
no
when honor dies, the man is dead.

make perfection, and that perfec-
trifles
trifle.
afl"airs of men, which, taken at the

on to fortune.
I slept, and dreamed that hfe was Beauty;
I woke, and found that life was Duty.
He who has a thousand friends hath not a friend to
a tide in the
is
flood, leads
15.
16.
spare.
And
he
17.
Happy
20.
21.
Try
who
has one enemy shall meet him everywhere.
the nation that has no history.

18. To live in hearts we leave behind is not to die.
19. The truly wise man will so speak that no one will observe how he speaks.
is
supposed him to be her.

to care for what is best in thought and action.
LESSON LX
REVIEW
Correct the errors and analyze these sentences
1.
We
should be careful, because each of us has our in-
fluence.
2.
Every one of you is expected to write his own essay.

{To write has the construction of an adjective used as
attribute complement.)
REVIEW
225
Us
girls are getting up a tennis club.

Mathematics are very difficult for me.
Most persons behave very good in church.
Two thousand dollars were divided between the
five
heirs.
10.
work is most done, and I am tired. (Use almost

whenever nearly may be used in its place.)
You will find me at home most any time.
The invalid is some better this morning. (Use somewhat ; some is an adjective.)
Plato believed that the soul was immortal.
II.
Columbus believed
12.
Pleasantly rose, next morn, the sun, on the village of
13-
Now
My
Grand
that the earth
is
round.
Pre.
the winter of our discontent
is
made
glorious by
the sun of York.

14.
IS-
No
16.
and Yankee vessel were sailing side by side.

king was ever so much beloved by his subjects as
British
King Edward.
17-
have heard that story of yours many times.

Of all other poets, Longfellow is my favorite.
18.
To dare
19.
Sweet
to
great, but to bear
is
it is
is
greater.
have done the thing one ought.
to
have done
thinj
one
ought.
I
lx><
It(
The
with
it.
infinitive to
IS
sweet
have done, with
all
its
After ought, to have done which,

20.
21.
modifiers,
is
is in
opposition
understood.
We always may be what we might have been.

We are made happy by what we are^ not by what
have.
22.
2324.
25.
gifts wax poor when givers prove unkind.

Honor or reputation are dearer than life.
The house stood on rather a narrow strip of land.
The remonstrance laid on the table.
Rich
HOENSHEL'S ENG. GRAM.
I5
we
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
226
LESSON LXI
in
Lessons 59 and
60.
LESSON LXII
WORDS AS DIFFERENT PARTS OF SPEECH
1.
Since
termines
its
it is
the use of a word in a sentence that defollows that
many words
as different parts of speech.
Above, for
part of speech,
may be used
it
instance, can be used as four different parts of speech
as
1.
2.
3.
4.
It
1.
3.
4.
sentence above
is
1.
3.
(Noun.)
all
As an adjective.
As an adjective pronoun.
As an adverb.
As a noun. (I have lost my
all.')
As a preposition.
As an adverb.
As a conjunctive adverb.
Write a sentence, using but

1
2.
3.
As a conjunction.
As a preposition.
As an adverb.
(Adjective.)
correct.
comes from above.
Write a sentence, using before

2.
4.
above the bridge. (Preposition.)

(Adverb.)
eagle soars above.
Write a sentence, using

2.
3.
He lives
The
The
2.
PUNCTUATION
5.
Write a sentence, using fast

As
As
As
As
1.
2.
3.
4.
6.
a noun.
an adjective.
a verb.
an adverb.
Write a sentence, using since
As a preposition.
As an adverb.
1.
2.
7.
22/
Write a sentence, using that
As an adjective.
As an adjective pronoun.
As a relative pronoun.
As an introductory conjunction (introducing a
1.
2.
3.
4.
sub-
ordinate clause)
8.
Write a sentence using
till
As a noun.
As a verb.
As a conjunctive adverb.
1.
2.
3.
LESSON
LXIII
PUNCTUATION
I.
Notice the punctuation of these sentences

Washington, who was born
1.
in Virginia,
was our
first
President.
He was
2.
looking out of the window and, therefore, did
not see
3.
In the
"
first
enthetical
The same
will
entering the room.

said, "
if I
have time."
who was born in Virginia^ is parcan be omitted without spoiling the sense.
true of therefore^ in the second sentence, and of she
sentence the clause,
that
is
me
come," she
is,
it
said, in the third sentence.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
228
2.
Parenthetical expressions are separated from the
by commas.
rest of the sentence

3.
An

1
We
2.
Next week, we
3.
We,
4.
begin our work.
shall
next week, shall begin our work.
when
When
work next week.
shall begin our
adverb phrase
sentence, or
it
out of
is
its
natural order
stands between a verb and
a phrase
out of
is
its
when
its
begins a
it
subject.
natural order,
it
is
separated from the rest of the sentence by
usually
commas.
5.
Punctuate the following sentences

1.
My brave men
2.
London
3.
Paris which
the largest city in the world

is
the general said charge for the guns.
situated
is
on the Seine
in
England.
is
the capital of
France.
4.
With merry
5.
meadows.
The date which
we wandered through
hearts
the beautiful
a kind of food grows on a palm
is
tree.
6.
The
minstrel sang a song played a tune
and danced a
jig-
7.
No no no
8.
9.
By
you cannot go.
youth a boy or a mere child could answer that

question.
10.
6.
7.
My
industry and perseverance

friend will you give
me
we
obtain knowledge.
a dollar
,-*

1.
My
2.
Joseph,
uncle Joseph
my
uncle,
is
a sailor.
is
a sailor.
Appositives, unless short and used as part of the
name, are separated from the
commas.
rest of the sentence
by
PUNCTUATION
8.
Punctuate these sentences

1.
229
Superintendent Saylor has charge of the
schools of
Lincoln.
2.
Saylor the superintendent has charge of the schools of
3.
Chancellor
4.
Tennyson the poet wrote " In Memoriam."

Bryant the American poet wrote '^Thanatopsis."
Lincoln.
5.
9.
Snow
lives in
Lawrence.
Write and punctuate a sentence containing

1.
2.
3.
A series of adverbs.
A parenthetical word.
A parenthetical clause.
5.
A
A
6.
An
4.
phrase out of
its
natural order.
quotation divided into two parts.

appositive that should be separated from the rest of
the sentence.
7.
An
appositive that should not be separated from the
rest of the sentence.
10,
Give two different meanings to this sentence by
punctuating differently
Mary Helen and
Julia
have gone.
LESSON LXIV
Diagram these sentences, and parse the
ciples,
and
infinitives
Talk not too much, nor of
2.
He
(Âs
is
It
is
not
dead.
much
as that of his adop-
a conjunctive adverb, connecting the
dependent clause to
3.
thyself.
loves not other lands so
tion.
verbs, parti-
known how
so.)
the Egyptians
embalmed
their
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
230
The English language has undergone many changes

since Shakespeare lived.
few tattered huts stand among shapeless masses of

masonry where glorious Carthage once stood.
room hung with pictures is a room hung with
thoughts.
The
greatest luxury
know,
is to do a good action by
found out by accident.
We venture to say that no poet has ever had to
struggle with more unfavorable circumstances than
and
stealth
have
to
it
Milton.
9-
From
the lowest depth there

heights.
was never
What we
sense,
we
alone than
less
traly
What
a path to the
loftiest
when by myself
and earnestly
are.
is
strive to be, that, in
some
not a double relative here,

expressed.)
is
because its antecedent is

noble things, not dream about them all day long.
If I should neglect to use my right hand, it would
forget its cunning.
(The subordinate clause often
precedes the principal clause.)
Instead of saying that man is the creature of circumstance, it would be nearer the mark to say that man is
the architect of circumstance.
Do
that
man
^
is
architect
to say
circumstance.
that
man
is
creature
the
saymg
'11 )
circumstance
would be
X mark
the
Some would
call Clearer
an adjective.
REVIEW
231
LESSON LXV
REVIEW
Correct
1.
necessary, and give reasons
2.
My!
3.
Two weeks'
don't that deer
know how
to run!
vacation are too much.
6.
There is a man and a woman on the bridge.

These kind of people will never succeed.
Have you any new children's shoes?
7.
This child
8.
Who
4.
5.
9.
10.
11.
will
real sick.
is
you vote for?
Him from my
childhood
have known.
Whom do you think was with

A speech should be judged by
me?
its
argument.
12.
Many
13.
There appear
14.
15.
This
16.
more sublime than any of the poets.

This opinion never has and never can prevail.
17.
a captain, with
all the crew, have been

be many others interested.
intended to have gone yesterday.
in
is
Milton
It
We
lost at sea.
to
accordance to
my
plans.
is
not only has beauty but
18.
19.
20.
when
In his pocket are a knife and a top.
utility.
saw a man digging a well with a Roman nose.

He seems to have the universal esteem of all men.
21.
How
22.
There
can we
is
tell
whom
'
to trust ?
plenty of molasses in the jug.
23.
Neither the army or navy was represented.
24.
Two
29.
of the boys have swam ashore.

Hadn't we ought to go?
The farmer went to his neighbor and told him that his
cattle were in his field.
(Use direct quotation.)
Has the second bell rang?
He owned an old and new house.
The old and the new governor are sitting in the carriage
30.
Either he or
25.
26.
27.
28.
side
by
side.
I
am
right.
PART FOUR
LESSON
COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES

1.
The
clauses of a
compound sentence
are
some-
times called Members.

2.
The
clauses of a
compound sentence may be
different classes, according to their form.
of
If the sen-
tence has but two clauses, the following varieties
may
be found
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Both clauses simple: America was discovered by the

Northmen, but they made no permanent settlement.
One clause simple, the other complex: America was
discovered by the Northmen, but they made no settlements that were permanent.
One clause simple, the other compound America was
discovered by the Northmen, but they made no permanent settlement, nor did they conquer the Indians.
One clause complex, the other compound America was
discovered by people who came from the northern
part of Europe, but they made no permanent settlements, nor did they conquer the Indians.
Both clauses complex: The Northmen discovered the
:
is now called America, but they made

no settlements that were permanent.
6. Both clauses compound
In the tenth century America
was discovered by the Northmen, and many of these
bold navigators crossed the Atlantic; but soon all
accounts of the discovery were forgotten, and America
was again unknown to Europeans.
the compound sentence has more than two members, many
country that
If
more
varieties
may be
found.
232
^Lcn?^(jw/v3o^^V3
THE COMPLEX SENTENCE
233
Write two compound sentences of each of the
3.
six
varieties mentioned.
The
4.
clauses of a complex sentence
according to their form.
may be
of dif-
If the
sentence
has but two clauses, the following varieties
may be
ferent classes,
found
1.
Both clauses simple: Rhode Island was settled by

Roger Williams, who had been expelled from Mas-
2.
One
3.
One
4.
One
sachusetts.
clause simple the other complex

Milton did not
educate his daughters in the languages because he
believed that one tongue is enough for a woman.
:
clause simple, the other compound When thy

wealth has taken wings, and when thy companions
have deserted thee, the true friend will still remain
:
faithful.
clause complex, the other compound When thy

wealth has taken wings, and thy companions have
deserted thee, the friend that is true will still remain
:
faithful.
Both clauses complex: When Lot had selected the

valley through which the Jordan flows, Abraham dwelt
on the hills that lie west of the river.
Both clauses compound Christ came and the new era
began when Greece had lost her greatness and the
seeds of decay had been planted in the Roman Em-
5.
6.
pire.
5.
in
The
following
paragraph 4
friend
is
the diagram of the third sentence
will
remain
true
faithful.
still
I
The
wealth
has taken
when
thy
companions
have
wmgs.
;;
deserted
thy
when
"
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
234
6.
Write one complex sentence of each of the
six
varieties just mentioned.
LESSON
IT
COMPLEX SENTENCES
I.
According
clauses), there are
The dependent
1.
2.
3.
4.
dependent clause
to the use of the
many varieties
may be
(or
complex sentences.
of
clause
An adjective clause.
An adverb clause of time.
An adverb clause of place.
An adverb clause of degree
as, "
He
writes as well
as he reads.'"
5.
6.
An
An
adverb clause of concession.

adverb clause of purpose
may
7.
8.
9.
An
An
An
11.
12.
13.
adverb clause of specification
14.
15.
may
A
A
We
eat that
we
The
as,
"
We
are anx-
succeed."
A noun clause used as subject.

A noun clause used as attribute
A noun clause used as object.
A noun clause used as object
"
as "
adverb clause of cause.

adverb clause of condition.
ious that he
10.
live."
prisoner has no idea of
complement.
of a preposition; as,
why he was
arrested."
noun clause in apposition with the subject.

noun clause in apposition with the object as, " The
young man obeyed the commandment, Honor thy
father and thy mother.'
noun clause in apposition with the attribute comple;
'
16.
ment.
many authors would supply ^'for this

word anxious^ and make the clause in apposition
In the ninth example,

thing''''
after the
with things but
it is
better to consider the clause an adverb modify-
ing the word anxious.
Other clauses of specification are found
in
PHRASES
these sentences
"
the North Pole."
We
''
are not certain that an open sea surrounds
The
invalid
be noticed that
It will
235
all
is
confident that he will recover.''
these clauses of specification modify
adjectives.
Write one complex sentence of each of the sixteen
2.
varieties just mentioned.
Write two complex sentences, each having two
3.
subordinate clauses.
LESSON
TIT
PHRASES
The
1.
subject with
all its
modifiers
the General Subject, by others

Subject, and by
still
others
In the same manner
ject.
it is
it is
called
is
called the
by some
Complex
called the Logical Sub-
we have
the General,
Com-
plex, or Logical Predicate.
Phrases are sometimes divided into Simple, Com-
2.
and Compound.
plex,
3.
is
a single phrase.
may have one of its principal elements com''To Boston and New York." "Into and out of the
" By reading books and magazines."
simple phrase
pound
as,
house."
4.
Simple Phrase
Complex Phrase
is
one having one of
modified by another phrase;

Transfiguration."
"
as,
'*
Reading a book
On
of
the
its
parts
Mount
poems."
of
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
236
5.
Compound Phrase
nected
and
New
to
as,
"Going
two or more phrases con-
is
and looking out."
in
''To Boston
York."
6.
Phrases are also Separable and Inseparable.
7.
Separable Phrase
is
one whose parts, or words,
can be parsed separately.

8.
An
Inseparable Phrase
not be parsed separately;
is
one whose words can-
as, *'at
once," "at
all,"
"in
vain."
07ice
is
not the object of
at,
but the two words should be parsed
together.
Infinitives are inseparable phrases.
9.

1.
2.
An
participial phrase.
7.
A
A
A
A
A
8.
An
3.
4.
5.
6.
infinitive phrase.
noun phrase.
simple phrase.
complex phrase.
compound
phrase.
separable phrase.
inseparable phrase.
LESSON IV
THE NOUN
I.
When
noun usually masculine or feminine
fers particularly to
the neuter gender

1.
Man
2.
Her name
is
a word and not

as
masculine, because
is
to a person,
Lizzie.
it
denotes males.
it is
re-
of
NUMBER
Man
person.
is
neuter, because
Lizzie
is
it
refers to the
neuter, because
it
237
word man and not to a
name and not to
refers to the
the person.
taken from foreign languages without

2. Nouns
change generally retain their original plurals.
Singular
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
238
5.
Compound words and combined words used

pluralize the base
nouns
principal
or
word
as
the
of
expression.
sons-in-law.
dukes of Wellington.
King of England kings of England.
Son-in-law
Duke
of Wellington
Such nouns as the preceding add the sign of possession to the last
word; as, "son-in-law's house," "Duke of Wellington's career,"
"
somebody
6.
else's
book."
Compounds ending
ing j; as
spoonful, spoonfuls.
the difference between " three cupfuls of vinegar " and
Cupful, cupfuls
What
is
" three cups

7.
full
When
and not
of vinegar "
noun
to objects,
2.
ful form the plural by add-
in
form refers
plural in
it is
to
some word
number
in the singular
as
Books is a common noun.

Boys is plural.
Books and boys are both singular, because each
refers to a single
word.
8.
Some
nouns, though always plural in form, are
singular
either
intended to
or
be
according to
plural
conveyed.
Such
the
are
meaning
odds,
meanSy
amends, wages, and some others.

9.
title,
In forming the plural of proper names with a
some authors
Brown.
pluralize
the
title
Others pluralize the name
as, the
as,
tJie
Misses
Miss
Browns.
The
latter
method seems the
each of two names,
Drs. Scott
(2r
Smith.
it
better
but
if
the
title
belongs to
should take the s in forming the plural
as,
CASE
Parse the words in
10.
How
1.
She
His
2.
3.
239
these sentences
italics in
do you parse the word boys
is
a personal pronoun.
title is
Duke of Marlborough.
Write the possessive singular and the possess-
11.
ive plural of these
nouns
brother-in-law, queen of England, captain of the ship, lieu-
tenant colonel.
LESSON V
CASE
Intransitive verbs
I.
sitive
after
the
and
their participles,
and
tran-
verbs in the passive voice, have the same case
them
as before
same person or
them when both words
refer to
(This rule will explain
thing.
predicate nominative.^
Pocahontas was married to an Englishman named John
1.
Rolfe.
John Rolfe
2.
Governor
is
in the objective case, to agree with
want him
is
to
Englishman.
be governor.
in the objective case to agree with
///;;/,
the objec-
tive subject of to be.
To
3.
President
is
be right
is
better than to be President (is good).
in the objective case, to agree with one or
understood, the objective subject of to
There
a curious exception to the rule just given.
with the construction of a noun

it
and the nominative case
after
may have
it
as,
person
be.
''
participle
the possessive case before
His being a scholar secured
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
240
Scholar
the situation."
his refer to the
He
difference."
is
nominative case although
in the
its
in
is
and
it
being he should make no
" Its
nominative
in the
bemg^ while
participle
is
same person.
case after the intransitive
the possessive case
before the
participle.
2.
Appositive and predicate nouns need not agree
with the principal term in gender, person, or number

as
2.
I am he.
He was eyes
3.
The Greeks, a synonym
1.
to the blind.
for
brave men, gained a great
victory over the Persians.
3.
clause,
noun may be
in apposition
with a phrase or
and a phrase or clause may be
in
apposition
with a noun.
1.
Her aiding me, a kindness

cause of
2.
my
She aided me
can never forget, was the
success.
in procuring a situation, a
kindness
can
never forget.
3.
This
task, to teach the
In the second sentence, kindjtess
young, has
is
with the preceding clause, although the clause

4.
A noun used independently

1.
2.
3.
4.
its
pleasures.
in the nominative in apposition
is
is
not a noun clause.
in the nominative
By direct address as, John^ come here."

By pleonasm as, " Cleveland^ he was President."
By exclamation as, " What a pleasure "
By subscription (as when signed to a letter or
''
other
written production).
5.
Absolute
as, "
The snow
melting, the river rose."
In order to be in the nominative absolute, the noun or pronoun
must be placed before a
participle
and must be independent of the
remainder of the sentence.

5.
noun
Each
of these sentences contains a
in the nominative,
noun
used independently.
or pro-
Pick out
CASE
each one, and decide whether
241
it is
nominative by direct
address, pleonasm, exclamation, subscription, or in the
nominative absolute:
The
Pilgrim Fathers, where are they
Great and manifold are thy works, O Lord

Mr. President I rise to ask a question.
2.
3.
5.
None but the brave

The Lord of the
6.
What
4.
deserve the fair.
Dryden.
Universe, he will hear their com-
plaints.
6.
joy,
what happiness!
Write a sentence having

1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
A noun in apposition with a phrase.

A noun in apposition with a clause.
A phrase in apposition with a noun.
A clause in apposition with a noun.
A pronoun, objective after an intransitive
A noun, nominative by direct address.
A noun, nominative by exclamation.
A noun, nominative by pleonasm.
A noun, nominative by subscription.
A noun, nominative absolute.
A pronoun, nominative absolute.
LESSON
verb.
VT
CASE
1.
In forming the possessive the additional
times omitted
when
sive sounds of
its
s is
some-
use would cause several succes-
as,/<?r conscience sake.
This omission of the
s is
not so
common now
as
it
was twenty
years ago.
2.
It
should be remembered that

16
when two
apposi-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
242
tives are in the possessive case, only
one
will take the
sign.
This
1.
is
Arnold's grave, the
"This
Better,
traitor.
is
the grave of Arnold, the traitor."
Here
2.
rests his
head upon the lap of
fortune and to fame
unknown.
earth,
{Youth
a youth to
the
in
is
possessive case, in apposition with his.)
3.
noun or pronoun placed before a
participle with
the construction of a noun should be in the possessive

case
as
1.
3.
Do
am opposed
to the gentleman's speaking again.
His being a good penman secured the position.

What do you think of my going to Europe?
2.
two sentences have the same meaning?

you studying Latin." " I am surprised
studying Latin." May both be correct?
these
surprised
4.
nouns
at
Each
of the following sentences has one or
in the objective case without a

1
He
2.
The sun
3.
4.
5.
(IVof'th
am
"I
at
your
two
governing word:
waited an hour.
shines night and day.

Four times every year he visits his old home.
Corn has grown ten inches this month.
Good horses are worth one hundred dollars a head.
is
an adjective, modifying horses. A

its object, but most authors
maybe
a prepo-
a an adjective and parse head in the objective case without a governing

sition,
with head for
call
word.)
6.
7.
5.
Some land will produce eighty bushels

Adams and Jefferson both died July 4,
Some
verbs seem to take two objects meaning the
same person
1.
2.
3.
4.
of corn an acre.
1826.
or thing
as
They made him king.

They chose him captain.
The people elected Harrison president.
The Dutch named the settlement New Amsterdam.
^Wk ^ f^^^ 2
63
CASE
In these sentences to be
ject,
making the
second
to be king."
may be
objective
Him
supplied before the last ob-
object the subject of the infinitive
first
the
object
243
to be
objective subject of to
be,
kmg
attribute;
is
and king
and the
"They made him
thus,
the object of made,
him
is
the
in the objective case to agree
is
with him.
6.
When
verbs of making, choosing, creating, elect-
two
ing, etc., take
of the action
is
objects, the
one showing the result
often called the Factitive Object (fac
make).
In the sentences given in paragraph
5, kitig,
captain, president,
and New Amsterdam are factitive objects.

as,
Sometimes the factitive object may be an adjective
" The medicine made the child sick."
Here sick modifies child,
It seems to me,
but it is called the factitive object by some.
;
however, that neither child nor sick

that the real object
is
Remark. Some
is
the object
made, but
of
child {to be) sick.

call
the factitive object
" objective comple-
ment."
7.
Some
verbs seem to take two objects, one denot-
ing a person and the other denoting a thing; as

1.
Aristotle taught Alexander philosophy.
2.
The queen asked Ahasuerus
In the
first
most grammarians call philosophy the

and say that Alexander is the object of a
understood.
considered the
a question.
sentence,
object of the verb,
preposition
object,
In
the
second
and Ahasuerus
is
sentence,
question
called the object
is
of a
preposition understood.
Greek grammars give such verbs two obno reason why the same may not be done in
English.
As either philosophy or Alexander can be made the
subject in the passive, it would seem that either can be consid"Alexander was taught philosoered the object of the verb.
phy." "Philosophy was taught to Alexander." If we call both
philosophy and Alexa?ider the objects in the active voice, when
The
jects,
Latin and the
and
see

ENGLISH GRAMMAR
244
Alexajider
the
object
made
is
subject, philosophy
the
the passive
of
verb.
This
can
in
is
be
parsed
harmony with
as
the
grammars, and is fully as logical and sensible as to say

Alexander was taught (as to) philosophy/' or " Ahasuerus was
asked (as to) a question."
Another peculiar objective is found in such sentences as " He
struck the rock a blow." Blow is undoubtedly in the objective case,
and we cannot easily supply a preposition before it. Of course, blow
classic
"
is
not the object of struck in the same sense that rock
is
something about struck that governs blow
8.
first
When
pronouns follow
me
but there
interjections, those of the
person are usually in the objective case
wretched
is,
as, "
Ah
"
!
Such objectives are not the object of the
interjection, but are in
the objective merely as a matter of custom.
Pronouns of the second or the third person following
inter-
jections are in the nominative case.
9.
2.
A compound phrase.
A complex phrase.
3.
The
1.
possessive plural q{ son-in-law.
11.
A predicate noun differing in number from the subject.

A noun, nominative by direct address.
A noun, objective case without a governing word.
A factitive object.
A pronoun, objective after an interjection.
A pronoun, nominative after an interjection.
A noun having no singular.
A noun having no plural.
12.
An
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
appositive differing in
number from the
principal
term.
Remark.
youth
In
sentence
rests his head, etc.,
2,
paragraph
making
2,
the meaning
rests transitive,
may be
with head iox
its
that the
object.
OUTLINE OF NOUN
LESSON
245
VII
OUTLINE
I.
Study the following outline of the noun.

Proper.
Classes
^
Common
abstract.
collective.
material.
verbal, etc.
masculine,
feminine,
Gender
neuter,
common.
[
Person
third.
Number
singular.
Properties
first.
second.
plural.
subject.
predicate,
apposition,
direct address,
'
nominative
exclamation,
pleonasm,
absolute,
subscription.
Case
owner.
apposition.
possessive
object of verb,
object of preposition,
apposition.
wL-jv,v,tivv,
objective
^vitiôut
gov. word.
sub. of infinitive.
y
2.
Write an essay on
just given.
objective attribute.
"The Noun,"
using the outline
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
246
LESSON
VIII
PARSING
I.
In the following sentences the word senator
used in
I.
all
the possible constructions of a noun
is
Nominative:
a.
Subject of the sentence
b.
In the predicate
c.
In apposition
d.
Direct address
e.
Exclamation:
Pleonasm
f.
g.
Absolute
h.
By
The
senator
is
speaking.
Mr. Clay is senator.

Mr. Clay, the senator, lived in Kentucky.
Senator,
when
will
you return?
noble Senator!
The
The
what did he say?
senator,
senator having concluded his address,
the meeting adjourned.
(signed to a letter or other written
subscription
production).
2.
Possessive:
a.
Owner: The
b.
Apposition
senator's election
is
assured.
Mr. Clay, the senator's, speech was printed
in all the great dailies.
3.
Objective:
The
a.
Object of a verb
b.
Object of a preposition
c.
Apposition
citizens
:
honor the senator.
voted for the senator.
d.
I saw Mr. Clay, the senator.

Without a governing word [The melon weighs forty
poimds.'] (Nouns referring to persons cannot be used
e.
Subject of infinitive
/.
Objective attribute
governing word.)
want the senator to succeed.
The people wished Mr. Clay to be
in the objective case without a
senator.
DIAGRAMING
2.
Pronouns can be used
in
247
most of the preceding
Write sentences, using pronouns instead
constructions.
of nouns.
3.
Diagram these sentences, and parse the words
in
italics
1.
Tenderly her blue eyes glistened, long ti7ne ago.

is usually parsed as an adjective modifying
In such sentences ago
time = past time), but I believe that ago is an adverb

modifying glistened, and the phrase long time modifies ago.
Take
time (ago
this sentence
'Mt happened forty years ago."
Now,
\{
forty years
modifies happened, and ago modifies years, the meaning is. "It
happened for forty years."
But the meaning is, " It happened ago
(in the past) (to the extent of) forty years."
2.
Each
in his
narrow
forever laid, the rude forefathers
cell
of the hamlet sleep.
6.
spring coming, the general began the campaign.

Ye everlasting /^/C'j I am with you once again.
He looked a sachem in red blanket wrapt.
Every why hath a wherefore.
7.
The
3.
4.
5.
.'
boast of heraldry, tht
And
all
that beauty,
all
pomp
of power.
that wealth e'er gave,
Await alike the inevitable hour
The
8.
9.
10.
11.
paths of glory lead bnt to the grave.
He was
driven an exile from his native land.

would be free himself vmist strike the blow.
Every sailor in the port
Knows that I have ships at sea.
Of the waves and winds the spo?'t
And the sailors pity me.
Where one lives as a ki?ig, many live 2.^ peasants.
Who
as
many
12.
wish
it
live := peasants.
to be distinctly
of his whereabouts.
understood that
know nothing
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
248
LESSON IX
THE PRONOUN
I.
personal
pronoun of the possessive form
often used without the
"This
is
yours, that
name
is
of the thing possessed
mine."
Here the things
sessed by yours and mine are not mentioned.

possessive
forms
sometimes
are
called
is
as,
pos-
Such
Possessive
Pronoims.
If these words are called possessive pronouns, they should not
be parsed as in the possessive case. In the above sentence yours
and mine are both in the nominative case, used in the predicate.
In " I have yours, you have mine," yours and 7nine are both in the
objective case, object of have.
possessive
pronoun
is
never in
the possessive case.

If
we supply
the
word
that
is
understood
{book., for
sentence becomes "I have your book, you have

book
is
the object of the verbs, and
my
example), the
book."
Now
your and my are personal proThis method is used by many
nouns in the possessive case.

authors.
It should be stated, however, that we cannot always
supply an understood noun thus, in '' A friend of mine," we cannot supply friends and say " A friend of my friends," because
the meaning may be very different from the original.
I prefer the
term possessive pronoun, and I parse ?ni?te as the object of the
;
preposition of.
Sometimes a noun may perform the same office as these possessive

pronouns as, " An uncle of John's." Here John's has the sign of
;
possession, but
is not in the possessive case, the idea of possession

being indicated by the preposition of John''s is in the objective
case although it has the sign of possession.
(It is but just to state
some grammarians consider the above sentence incorrect, and

it to
'-An uncle of John"; but the expression has the
sanction of good authority, and is in our language to stay.)
that
change
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN

2.
Clause
Restrictive
meaning
of the
word
it
one that
is
modifies
as
249
restricts
the
(The relative
is the horse that my friend bought.
clause limits horse to one particular horse.)
This
1.
2.
have the book that you mentioned.
The boy that was here yesterday is twelve years old.

The boy, who was here yesterday, is twelve years old.
3.
4.
(Not
restrictive.)
In the fourth sentence, the hearers are supposed to know what

The speaker starts out to inform them that
particular boy is meant.
is twelve years old, but he gives the additional information
(almost by way of parenthesis) that the boy was here yesterday.
The hearers did not know he was here yesterday, so that the speaker
the boy
In such sentences, the relative
gives information in both clauses.
clause
is
not restrictive.
know what
boy the speaker has in mind several boys may have been
Therefore, the speaker informs them that
mentioned previously.
the particular boy that was here yesterday is twelve years old. The
In the third sentence, the hearers are not supposed to
particular
relative clause does not
knew he was here
give additional
information
yesterday, but did not
know he
is
hearers
the
twelve years
In such sentences the relative clause is restrictive.

Notice the punctuation of the third and fourth sentences.
old.
3.
That should be used instead
of
who
or which in
restrictive clauses.
Many good
4.
writers
and speakers do not follow
Appositives,
participial
when not
clauses,
phrases,
restrictive, are
this rule.
and
relative
usually set off
by
commas.
5.
and
Examine the
relative
clauses in these sentences,
select those that are restrictive.

1.
recently heard one of the best orators that live in
America.
2.
The diamond, which

gem.
is
pure
charcoal,
is
a brilliant
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
250
The diamond
3.
that the countess wore cost fifty thousand
dollars.
My
4.
March
4, 1895.
5.
My
6.
Listen to the song that nature sings.
7.
He
was a member of the congress that expired
friend
March
6.
was a member of the 53d congress, which
friend
expired
1895.
4,
was the
drollest fellow that
ever saw.
Select the correct pronoun in these sentences
was the first (that, who) entered.

This is the same story (that, which) we read before.
(When the subject is
It was not I (who, that) did it.
the predicate pronoun is generally followed by
//,
He
2.
3.
that.^
Was
you or the wind (who, that) shut the door

I have is thine.
Yesterday I met an old friend, (that, whom) I
4.
it
All (which, that)
5.
6.
failed
to recognize.
Yesterday
7.
met an old
friend (that,
whom)
failed to
recognize.
He
8.
sold his bay horse, (which, that)
had been given
to
him.
He
9.
sold the bay horse (which, that) had been given to
him.
LESSON X
I.
As
\s>
used as a relative pronoun after such, many,
and same.
3.
(We might say "who love

love me.
me," but as sounds better than who.
Milton.
Tears, such as angels weep, burst forth.
I shall not learn my duty from such as he.
4.
As many
1.
2.
love such as
as were called responded.

2.
25
Give the construction of the relative as
in
each of
the preceding sentences.

3.
But,
when
that not,
equivalent to
sometimes
is
used as a negative relative pronoun.

1
2.
3.
4.
The
Where
There
There
breathes the foe but
no wind but soweth seeds of a better
relative
pronoun
is
it.
life.
frequently understood.
1.
Men
5.
is
2.
4.
before us
falls
here but knows
not a
All the wealth he had ran
3.
will reap the things
in his veins.
they sow.
Let not harsh words mar the good we might do

Take the goods the gods provide thee.
The orator we heard is from Kentucky.
The antecedent
5.
man
is
of a relative
is
here.
sometimes under-
stood.
6.
1.
Who
2.
Whom
3.
Let him be
steals
purse steals trash.
who he may.
Parse the relative pronouns found in the sentences
under paragraphs
7.
my
the gods love die young.
In Part
3, 4,
Three
and
the
5.
compound
relatives
whoever
and whosoever were declined, giving the forms whosever,

whosesoever, whomever, and whomsoever.
Not all authors agree to this. Maxwell says, ''Whosoever is the

compound relative declined." Harvey says, "Compound
only
Notwithstanding the assertions of these

eminent authors, I believe that the possessive and objective forms of
whoever and whosoever are good English.
As a compound relative always performs two offices (its own, and
in
that of its unexpressed antecedent), some persons have difficulty
when
form
objective
the
or
nominative
deciding whether to use the
relatives are^ indeclinable."
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
252
one
office
sentence
Whoever
other
the
from and
compound
sells
the subject of
it
Take
As
sells.
is
this
cheapest.
the office of
the subject of the subor-
is
The
dinate clause, and therefore should have the nominative form.
understood antecedent
If
we supply
changed
'^
all
relatives in the subordinate clause that determines its
In the above sentence whoever
form.
objective.
whoever
from
purchase
shall
pronouns are found in subordinate clauses,
relative
the
We
the object of
is
and
nominative
is
"
is
the object oi from in the principal clause.
antecedent,
the
who ;
to the simple
the
thus, "
compound whoever should be

We shall buy from him who
sells cheapest.''
Whomever you select will go," the subordinate

Whomever you select," and whomever is the object of
The principal clause is,
therefore, it has the objective form.
In the sentence, "

clause
select]
"
He
is
"
(or that one) will go."
8.
compound
relative
Select
2.
Give
it
9.
The
youwish.
wants
to
long will find trouble.
prize
is
Observe that a
pendent,
it.
lives
3.
4.
proper form of the
these blanks with the
Fill
wins
for
relative
In the following sentences,
2.
Who
3.
It
is
who
is
is
is
always in a de-
always a connective.
a not a relative, but
know who
1.
pronoun
and
adjective clause,
an interrogative
it.
did
it.
the legal speaker of the house has not yet been
determined.
There
10.
is
has not yet been decided
an indirect question
who
discovered America.
each of the above sentences.
Give the construction of the relative out
sentence of paragraph
11.
in
in
each
3.
Write a sentence having a compound relative
the objective case.
in
REVIEW
253
LESSON XI
REVIEW
In the following sentences the pronouns
1.
Examine
with their antecedents.

1.
2.
3.
In such sentences as "
is
//
is
are) in the wrong."
but
li
you that
some gram-
will succeed,"
Change the sentence

If that agrees
with
it,
to " It
the verb
writers
correct
believe
which
At the same time, I believe the majority of
and speakers would use are as the predicate of that in
the relative
//
and
you that
is
is is
that agrees with yoie^ the verb are should be used.
particular
good
It is
the antecedent of that^ and others say that
the antecedent.
(is,
that
He is one of the best men that live in the city.

Every boy and girl must depend on himself.
All boys and girls must depend on themselves.
marians say that
you
carefully
agree
is
clause
is
restrictive
limits
it,
telling
yo7i.
the given sentence.

2.
Select the correct sentence from each of these
pairs
f
'
3.
nouns
Fill
It is I
lit
is I
that
am
that
is
standing here,
standing here.
It is
they that were responsible.
It is
they that was responsible.
these blanks with the proper personal pro-
1.
Neither of us
2.
4.
John and I have

John and you have
Each member of this
5.
Two
3.
is
willing to give
up
claim.
lessons.
lessons.
class
must have
or three of us have finished
own
work.
book.
ENGLISH GRAiMMAR
254
4.
6.
The mother,
7.
If
as well as the father,
you should find

to me.
my

a friend which
1.
This
2.
Thou
art the
3.
Take
that
is
must do
part.
horse or cow, please bring
love.
man who
book
to
has done the crime.

the library, which I
left
on the
table.
4.
There was a bird caught by the
fox,
which was web-
footed.
5.
6.
7.
5.
prisoner was sentenced by the judge, who committed the crime.

This is the vice that I hate.
Jamestown was the first permanent settlement which
was made in the United States by the English.
The
Correct the case forms where necessary

1
2.
3.
Who
will
you
select for secretary
Let (he, him) be (who,

A gentleman entered
whom) he may.
who I afterward
learned was
the governor of the state.

gentleman entered who I afterward found out to be
4.
5.
Who
6.
She who
studies, the teacher will
7.
Give the
letter to
the governor of the state.

shall
go
to
commend.
Henry, (he, him) who
is
standing by
the gate.
8.
refer to
Newton, he who discovered the law of gravi-
tation.
10.
You may guess who it is.

You may guess whom they
11.
Whom
9.
6.
elected.
did you say was chosen?
in
the nominative case.

7.
in
the possessive case.

8.
May any
one of the pronouns
correct for the blank in sentence
i,
Jiis,
her, our,
paragraph 3?
be
PARSING
255
LESSON
XII
PARSING
I.
Parse the nouns and pronouns in these sentences

1.
He
granted
my
an act
request,
for
which
greatly
esteem him.
2.
3.
He
He
that formed the ear, shall he not hear?
waited an hour, staff in hand.
He
waited
hour
staff
L
(being)
5*
4.
5.
6.
hand.
Next Anger rushed, his eyes on fire.

Whosoever will, let him come.
Whomsoever the governor selects
shall
receive
the
appointment.
7.
The
Give the prize to whomever you deem most worthy.
following
is
an outline of the pronoun

simple.
J
personal
compound.
simple.
relative
double.
compound.
Classes
interrogative,
f
adjective
demonstrative.
indefinite,
1^
possessive.
3.
Write an essay on
line just given.
*'
The Pronoun," using
the out-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
256
LESSON
XIII
DIAGRAMING AND PARSING

Diagram these sentences, and parse the words
in
italics
1
The
noblest soul
is
that which choses the right, not for
gain or glory, but because

2.
All prize
3.
Happy
the
is
man who
and
We
right.
has mastered the most
of life's problems, na?nely,
4.
'tis
most what they do not possess.

iho. problem
difficult
of living wisely
well.
teach
much when we
are not teaching at
all
un-
conscious influence.
5.
Do and
6.
have your pupils do and be.

Education is the debt the present
be, so nearly as in
you
lieth,
what you would

owes
to
future
generations.
7.
The comprehensive law
of education
is,
" Exercise gives
development."
8.
would rather be right with the few than wrong with
the tnany.
Rather
an adverb, the comparative of an obsolete positive,
is
rath^ or rathe.
9.
Friendship! mysterious cement of the soul, sweetener of
and solder of society.

mind to me a kingdom is.
There is nothing great on earth but man', there
life
ID.
11.
My
nothing great in
man
is
but mind.
12.
Aristotle tells us that a statue lies buried in a block of
13.
14.
Ill
marble.
heard that that
Where
15.
man
that was expected has arrived.
fares the land, to hastening
Blessed
wealth accumulates and

is
the
man whose God
ills
2iprey,
men
is
decay.
the Lord.
REVIEW
257
LESSON XIV
REVIEW
1.
Correct where necessary, and analyze these sen-
tences
1.
Let not him boast that puts his armor on, but he that
2.
Oh, no,
takes
And him
3.
child 'twas not in war.
that kills a single
Let none touch
5.
He
He
6.
His
4.
it off.
my
is
the
is
the
is
it
but they
man his neighbors

who are clean.
abhor.
man who was thought to be you.

man who you were thought to be.
the language of the heart.
8.
The time of prosperity will come who doubts

I can make it clear that I am innocent.
9.
Bring such books as will be needed.
7.
all
10.
Whom
11.
Gentle reader,
12.
All,
13.
Tell me, in confidence,
it?
do people say won first place in the contest?

let you and me walk in the paths of
virtue.
save
I,
were pleased.
whom
2.
Write a sentence in which as
3.
Write a sentence
in
is
she you love.
is
a relative pronoun.
which but
is
a relative pro-
noun.
4.
Write a sentence in which a relative pronoun
is
understood.
5.
Write a sentence containing a
restrictive relative
clause.
6.
Write a sentence containing a non-restrictive
tive clause.
17
rela-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
258
LESSON XV
THE ADJECTIVE
When
1.
tives
is
used with two or more adjec-
belonging to different nouns, the
repeated
When
if
the article
as,
''
article
should be
a large and a small house " (two houses).

used in comparative expressions with than,
same person or
should not be repeated as, " He is a better
the article
is
the nouns before and after than both refer to the
thing, the article
soldier than statesman."
2.
One
"a
adjective sometimes limits another; as,
deep blue color."

3.
An
adjective sometimes modifies an adjective
a noun combined;
fies
as,
"a good
old man."
6^^?^^
modi-
old man.
Notice the difference in the meaning of these expressions

good old man," and " a good, old man."
4.
and
"a
In such expressions as "two hundred bushels,"
some authors claim that hundred is

the adjective two, and that bushels
a noun, modified by
is
the object of the
preposition of understood.
as
I see no reason why two hundred cannot be parsed together
Three, six thousatid,
one adjective, just as we parse seventy-five.
four dozen, etc, all answer the question, "How many?" and should
be treated as simple adjectives.
THE ADJECTIVE
5.
When
most^ nearly
authors consider 7nore and most adverbs.
all
In more Joyful,
positive degree
if
we
Do
compared with more and
are
adjectives
^2x?>%
not
all
joyful as an adjective,
agree that tnore joyful
tive degree of the adjective/^///^//
the comparative degree,

7nore by
7nore joyful
6.
why
itself,
and
When
259
why
If
it
not in the
the compara-
both words are required for
not parse them together?
not parse er in older by
tnost
is
is
itself
If
we parse
prefer to parse
joyful together.
the comparative degree of a word
fol-
is
lowed by than, the positive degree of the same word

understood in the subordinate clause, and than
is
is
a con-
junctive adverb connecting the two clauses.

In "
He
is
older than
dependent clause.
am
Good
writers
am," old is understood after am, and the

is an adverb clause of degree, modify-
old,"
Than connects
ing older.
7.
"
the clauses and modifies old.
and speakers sometimes use the
superlative
when comparing only two
such use
contrary to the rules of grammar.
8.
is
degree below the positive
adding ish ;
9.
When
is
objects,
although
sometimes made by
as, blackish, greenish.
two or more adjectives are connected by
conjunctions, the shortest and simplest should generally
be placed
first;
as,
''This tree
is
larger and
more
useful than that."
When
adjectives thus connected are
compared
differently,
authors say they should be arranged as stated above, and that

or most should be placed before the
righteous cause never existed."
first
believe
as, "
it
is
nobler and more righteous cause never existed."
some
fitore
more noble and
better to say,
''
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
26o
The word
10.
like,
when used
an intransitive verb,
some grammarians prefer

He
In "
is
an adjective, although
often
is
appositively or after
to call
a preposition.
it
an adjective, modifying
like his father," like is
he,
and
the object of to or unto understood.

Here, like has the
meaning of sitnilar. In " He, like the brave man he was thought
father
is
ground,"
be, firmly held his
to
tively
and modifies
adverb, modifying
When
like is
ca7i
run, and deer
an adverb,
it
an adjective, used apposi-
like is
"She can run
In
he.
means
is
like a deer,"
///^^
is
an
the object of to understood.
similarly, or in
a similar manner.
do not think that like is ever a preposition.

The words unlike, near, nigh, and opposite should be treated
I
as the
word
Less should be applied to nouns of magnitude
11.
and fewer should be applied
(bulk),
titude
just
like.
(many)
as, less
money,
less
nouns of mul-
to
water ; fewer
dollars,
fewer gallons.
12.
Many
a and wJiat a should often be parsed
gether as one adjective
blush unseen."
"
as, "
What
Many
a crash that was
What a is sometimes an adverb as, " What

"
What a is an adverb, modifying large.
;
is
a flower
13.
elder),
Old has two forms

and two
for
Elder and eldest are

older and
oldest
are
the
for the
is
"
!
a large parade that
comparative (older,
superlative (oldest,
appUed
only to
applied to
to-
born to
eldest).
persons,
but
persons, animals, or
things.
14.
verb),
Further and furthest come from forth (an ad-
and farther and farthest come from far.
..
REVIEW
261
LESSON XVT
REVIEW
Correct the errors, and parse the words in
better statesman than a general.
Washington was a
2.
This
3.
The Russian Empire
4.
He
5.
The banner
man
of
others
all
italics
most to be pitied.
more extensive than any natios
is
is
on the globe.
is
a better disciplinarian than teacher.
a blue
6.
Fire
7.
of the United States
is
a red, a white, an(?
flag.
a better servant than a master.
is
and pale
rosy-faced
girl
were seen
sitting side
by
side.
8.
9.
The pen
is
He was
such a criminal, that a few persons mourned
10.
rosy-faced
and a
pale girl
was seen
in the
company.
a mightier weapon than sword.
his death.
1 1
Although he was unpopular, yet he had few
12.
Grief
13.
He was
struck dead.
14.
A good
farmer keeps his horses /<2/^.
15.
All went
16.
The hunter was
made her
merry
friends.
insane.
as a marriage bell.
so badly frightened that he turned
pale.
and mighty above
17.
Great
18.
Unheard., because our ears are dull,
is truth,
all
things.
Unseen., because our eyes are dim,
He walks our earth, the Wonderful,

And all good deeds are done to Him.
19.
Give him
this
memoranda.
Jacob loved Joseph more than all his children.

21. This is a better furnished room than any in the house.
20.
22.
Noah and
his family outlived all the people that lived
before the flood.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
262
LESSON XVII
THE VERB
A verb is
1.
as, "
sometimes combined with a preposition
This must be attended
This combining does not often occur in the active voice.

"
The mayor must
attend
IS
pound
attend to this matter," to
is
a preposition,
is
In
and
In "This matter must be attended to by the
intransitive.
mayor,'' to
to!'
part of the verb,
verb, transitive, passive.
object in the active voice,
and
and
?mist be attended to
The verb attend

is
will
a com-
is
not take an
passive only with the aid of the
preposition.
Other examples are

1.
He was laughed
2.
The
at
by the boys.
property was taken possession
of.
(Better
" Pos-
session was taken of the property.")

3.
The
4.
That should have been thought
2.
carriage has been sent for.
verb that,
when
complete predicate by
as
of.
joined to a subject, will form a
itself, is
called a
Complete Verb
1.
The baby
2.
Birds
3.
verb
sleeps.
fly.
that,
when
joined to a subject, will not
form a complete predicate by
itself, is
called an
Incom-
plete Verb.
The word used
with an incomplete verb
is
called the
Comple-
ment.
Most
The
plete,
intransitive verbs are complete.
intransitive verbs appear^ be, become, seem, etc., are incom-
and require complements.
Copulative Verbs.
These verbs are sometimes
called
THE VERB
The complement
object.
plement
4.
of a transitive verb in the active voice
''
He was
considered
Verb
Finite
com-
brave.''''
any mode or tense
is
its
is
transitive verb in the passive voice often takes a
as,
263
of the verb
except the infinitives and the participles.

definition for a finite verb might be, "
The
that changes
changeable
its
not
Infinitives
form to agree with

infinite.
and
do not change their form to agree with

words they modify. For this reason they are
participles
their subjects or the
not
any mode or tense

Finite means
subject."
its
finite.
5.
Ca7i
have
is
usually given as one of the signs of
the potential, present-perfect

6.
The
so-called
but
its
use
is
very rare.
past tense of the potential
does not express past
time,
but
either
mode
present
or
future.
This tense is called past because in early English, or AngloSaxon, fnight, could, would, and should meant past time.
7.
The
imperative
the third person
is
is
conjugated only in the

in either the first or
as
2.
Turn iê aside and rest awhile.

Be // resolved by this society.
3.
Blessed be he that
8.
mde
may be found
second person, but
first
invented sleep.
In some grammars the past tense, progressive form,
called the Imperfect (not finished)
Tense
as, "
He
was walking
9.
sive
Sometimes a progressive form

voice
lesson
as,
"
was being
The house
is
is
being
used
in the pas-
built."
"
The
recited."
authors object to some such forms, and prefer to use the

In these examples
as, " The house is building.''
active progressive
it is better to use the passive form (cumbersome as it is) than the
Some
..
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
264
active.
common that they can

Wheat is selling for a dollar
few active forms have become so
claim the sanction of good usage
"
as,
a bushel."
When we
10.
speak of a past action or event, and no

it took place remains,
we
part of the time in which
should use the past tense but if there still remains

some portion of the time in which it took place, we
;
should use the present-perfect tense.

1.
made
Science has
2.
Many
3.
4.
Examples
great advancement this century.
battles were fought during the eighteenth century.

have been reading this morning. (It is not yet noon.)
(It is past noon.)
read this morning.
11. When two past actions or events are referred to,

one of which must have occurred before the other, this
sequence of time must be observed in the use of the
Examples
tenses.
went, but
have returned.
1.
2.
After Lee had been defeated at Gettysburg, he retreated
into Virginia.
3.
Napoleon reigned one hundred days

turned from the Island of Elba.
he had
re-
Statements always true or always false should be
12.
expressed in the present tense
as
Galileo believed that the earth moves.
2.
Our
fathers asserted that all
men
are created equal.
Correct where necessary, and parse the words in
13.
italics
after
2.
He was well taken care of.

The actor was looked at by
3.
Be\\. k7iown to all
4.
all over the country.

houses last year.
I built three houses this year.
After we visited Paris we returned
5.
6.
7.
Corn
is
have
thousands.
men.
gathering
built three
to
the
States.
8.
It
was proved years ago that the
air
had weight.
United
WOULD
SHALL, WILL; SHOULD,
LESSON
XVIII
WOULD
SHALL, WILL; SHOULD,

In
cult
many
265
cases the correct use of these words
to determine.
It
is
a well-established
is
dififi-
fact
that
in their use of
good writers and speakers do not agree

these words.
Where one good
you can
another equally as good using should.
find
Yet, a certain writer on English
writer will use wotild,
grammar
boldly
the assertion that carelessness or ignorance
is
makes
the only
excuse that can be offered for not using these words

correctly.
What
that
grammarian
some standard author may
Of
course, in the
calls correct usage,
call incorrect.
more common uses
the observing student need have but
The primary meaning
of will
is
nation, and the primary meaning
Shall in the
trouble.
purpose or determi-
of shall
is
obligation.
person and will in the second and
first
Will in the
third simply foretell.
determination.
of these words,
little
person expresses
first
/ will go means that
am
determined
Shall in the second and third persons means
to go.
an obligation not controlled by the subject, but by some

external influence.
going
assist
one.
is
Yoti shall
go means that the
not controlled by yourself.
me means
that
you
will
act of
You shall not
be prevented by some
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
266
In interrogative sentences, shall denotes that the sub-
under some external influence, and will denotes
ject is
that the act

?
there
"
controlled
is
by the
might be answered by " Yes,

" Will
vented by circumstances."
No
"
be answered by
Shall you be
*'
subject.
if
am
you be there
not pre?
"
might
do not care to go."
Rhetoric gives the following forms in inter-
Hill's
rogative sentences
Future of Deter7mnation
Shall I (we) go?
Will you go?
Shall he (they) go?
Future of Expectation
Shall I (we) go?
Shall you go?
Will he (they) go?
Should and would follow
in general the
Would \^ often used to

Would that I were at home
shall and will.
wish
as,
The
"
following
is
same
rules as
express a strong
"
!
from Richard Grant White
To my readers I shall venture to say that if they express hoping

and wishing and the like with will and would, and command, demand,
for example,
I hope
and mandatory desire with shall and should
that Mrs. Unwin will invite them to tea," and " I wish that Mrs. Unwin would invite them to tea " but " He commands that Mrs. Unwin
shall invite them to tea," and " He desired that Mrs. Unwin should
invite them to tea"; and, impersonally, "It is wished that no person shall leave his seat," and " It was requested that no persons should
'^
they
leave their seats "

I.
The
will not
be
far
from
right.
following uses of shall, will, shouldy and would
are correct
I.
fear
we
shall
2.
fear
he
will
shall enjoy the visit.
3.
4.
It is
5.
have
rain.
neglect his business.
requested that no one shall leave the room.
shall
be obliged to discuss this subject.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
6.
Where
7.
When
8.
It
you be next week

you go ?
shall
shall
267
was intended that the army should march the next

day.
9.
We
10.
2.
Fill
should be happy to see you.

him to stay, but he would come.
told
shall, will, should,
each of these blanks with
or would,
and give reasons.
3.
betray him.
He knew who
I do ?
What
we finish this book
When
4.
^^
We
6.
He
7.
It
1.
2.
pay him to-day
^.
demand
he
it.
favor us.
be pleased if you
not succeed.
was afraid that he
probably rain to-day.

he be allowed to go on
8.
If
if
we
go
we hear good
to the concert,
sing-
ing?
that Crete were free
10.
LESSON XIX
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MODE
I.
ent.
The
subjunctive
mode has but one
tense, the pres-
In the verb be two subjunctive tenses are found,
the present and the past.

Probably authors differ more in their discussion of the subjunctive mode than in the discussion of any other part of grammar.
tenses,
some
and some only a small piece of a
tense.
Some
give this
mode
six
four,
some
three,
some two,
that is, the

In the classic languages, mode is a change of form
Some grammaverb has a different form for the different modes.
rians adhere to this principle in English, while others claim that mode
;
is
a change of meaning, not a change of form.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
268
If we examine the verbs in the sentences " I had gone " and " If
had gone," we shall find that the verbs are the same, and that the
Now, as // is not part of
difference is made by the little word if.
the verb, some say the verb in both sentences is in the same mode,
I
the indicative.
believe this
the correct view of the matter.
is
It
certainly has the merit of simplicity.
Taking the view that mode
is
a change of form, there are but two

" If thou
subjunctive forms in each verb (except the verb to be)
go," and " If he go."

lar
but, as not all
we can
correctly say there
If
tive.
These are both in the present tense, singU'

persons and numbers of the tense are included,
we drop
only a piece of a tense in the subjunc-
is
the zf in the above sentences, go in the
first
must
be changed io goest, and in the second to goes.

"If he walks" is indicative, and "If he walk" is subjunctive.
The s is omitted from the verb in the subjunctive because the aux" If he walk " means " If he
iliary shall or should is understood.
shall
The
(or should) walk."
subjunctive present denotes future
and should not be used to denote present time. " If it rains "
" If it rain " is subis indicative present, and denotes present time.
junctive present, and denotes future time.
" If I be," and " If I
In the verb to be there are two subjunctives
time,
The
were."
first is
called present tense, but denotes future time
As the
some form of the verb to be, verbs in the
passive voice can have two subjunctives, a present and a past as,
" If I be seen," and " If I were seen."
the second
is
called past tense, but denotes present time.
passive voice always has in
it
Write three sentences, each having a verb
2.
in the
subjunctive
1
Passive, present.
3.
Passive, past.
The
3.
wish
Active, present.
2.
as,
subjunctive
"
Would
In the above, were
is
that
is
sometimes used
my
in expressing a
father were here."
subjunctive, past, but denotes present time.
AGREEMENT OF VERB
269
LESSON XX
PERSON AND NUMBER OF THE VERB
It
I.
is
collective
sometimes difficult to determine whether a

noun should have a singular or a plural verb
to agree with
it.
Collective nouns denoting persons are

plural
than
more frequently considered
those denoting
things.
It is
public are invited " than to say " The public
individuals
If the
it
perform
various times) have passed to-day,
becoming
say
"
The
or in groups,
number of soldiers (at

and the number at the fort is
as,
''
large."
When
2.
to
invited."
the act separately,
better to have the verb plural
is
better
is
a verb has two subjects taken separately,
number, the verb agrees with the subject
differing in
nearest.
In such cases
verb
as, "
it is better to place the plural subject next to the

Neither the captain nor the soldiers have arrived."
In such sentences as " John and his sister too is

going," or ^']Q\ixv and his sister also is going," the verb
3.
should be singular.
be observed that the speaker does not intend to convey
information that two are going.
The hearer already knows
that John is going, and the speaker adds that his sister is going
It will
the
also.
4.
When
two singular subjects connected hy and
in apposition, the verb
is
singular
as,
The
*'
2iXQ
philoso-
pher and statesman has gone."

The same
latter is
and
is
added
front of
my
when the subjects are not in

make the former more emphatic
true
to
offense
is this."
apposition, if the
as, " The head
;
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
270
Often the number of the verb depends on the idea

the mind of the speaker rather than on the words he
5.
in
uses
as
Why
is dust and ashes proud?

Seven hours is a long time to wait for a train.
Six dollars and seventy-five cents is too much.
1.
2.
3.
In the first sentence, the speaker

said " dust and ashes.'"'
had
in
mind
tnan, although he
In the second sentence, the seven hours are thought of as one con,
tinuous period of time.
In the third sentence, the dollars and cents are thought of as
one
price.
As
6.
a rule, the phrase modifying the subject has
no influence
determining the number of the verb,
in
but in some cases

the subject
is
it
This
has.
especially true
when
a fraction.
Nine tenths of the men were lost.

Nine tenths of the wheat was lost.
1.
2.
Both of the preceding are
correct.
multitude (composed of individuals)

a
is
noun of magnitude (bulk).
of the water
is unfit
In the first, 7nen is a noun of

while in the second, wheat is
In like manner we have " Two thirds

and " Two thirds of the apples are
to drink,"
rotten."
The verb
7.
need,
when followed by
third person singular without adding j
not,
;
forms the
as "
He
need
not go."
The
verb dare
is
sometimes used
in the
same manner
as,
"
The
prisoner dare not speak."

8.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Neither he nor you was there.

To reveal secrets or to betray one's friends is perfidy.
Eight horses is no part of twelve cows.
Eight is what part of twelve?
There was not a little tact and shrewdness in the
transaction.
REVIEW
8.
He and his father were on the lost steamer.

He and his father too were on the lost steamer.
He as well as his father were on the lost steamer.
9.
One
6.
7.
10.
1 1
12.
13.
the
or
more names
are omitted from the
list.
Seven eighths of the pupils are girls.

Three fourths of his hair are gray.
Two hundred bushels of potatoes are often raised
from one acre of ground.
Forty bushels of wheat is sometimes obtained from
one acre of ground.
Write
9.
271
first six
two sentences
at least
paragraphs of
to illustrate
each of
this lesson.
LESSON XXI
REVIEW
1.
Correct where necessary, and parse the verbs

1.
To thine own self be

And it must follow, as
4.
the night the day,

not then be false to any man.
slay me, yet will I trust him.
If he is a scholar, he is not a gentleman.
Had you come earlier, you could have seen him.
5.
Whether he be poor
2.
3.
true,
Thou canst
Though he
or rich, he shall be punished for
his crime.
6.
Were he my own
brother,
should not excuse his
fault.
7.
8.
Although he is my brother, I would not trust him.

Unless a farmer sow, he must not expect to reap.
Notice that when a sentence begins with the subordinate clause,

the pronoun will be in the principal clause and the antecedent in the
subordinate clause.
9.
10.
wish that he was wealthy.

not only found the questions easy, but very
We
verting.
Notice that questio?is

2.
is
not the object oi found.
di-
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
2/2
LESSON XXII
INFINITIVES AND PARTICIPLES
1.
as,
The infinitive is sometimes used independently

To tell the truth about the matter, I was not
;
'*
paying attention."
Not
2.
In "
all infinitives
are parsed as having subjects.
have a book to read," to read is parsed as having the

construction of an adjective, and nothing is said about its subI
ject.
3.
in
The
infinitive
has the construction of an adjective
such sentences as
4.
Part Three
In
present
" I
and
want
my
watch
was stated that the names
it
present-perfect,
applied to infinitives,
as
do not have reference to the time

infinitive,
but to
infinitive is the
its
same
form.
You
gone."
will
often
accordance
with
hear such
finite
the
know
yet been done.

5.
verbs,
the
of
finite
expressions
as
present-perfect
verb.
"
hoped
preceding
rule,
the
the time
present-perfect infini-
the hoping was
done;
when the hoping was done, the going had

The sentence should be, " I hoped to go."
that
Participles do not have the construction
although they sometimes seem to
predicate.
have
to
verb hoped expresses past time, and, in
tive expresses time previous to
but we
of the present
as that of the finite verb in the
previous to that of the
Now, the
expressed by the
The time
same sentence, and the time

infinitive is
to run."
of
not
ad-
modify the
THE PARTICIPLE
273
In "The Indians ran screaming in pursuit/' screaming has

construction of an adjective (in the predicate), modifying
The same is
/ndiafis, but in sense it seems to modify ran.
the
true
the
In
he,
running to me.''
although it appears to
languages,
classic
tell
participles
of adjectives, and have the
struction
Running
He came
"
in
belonging to
he came.
the
is
an adjective,
in which
manner
always
have
the
con-
same gender, number, and
case as the nouns or pronouns to which they refer.
When
6.
it
seems
a participle
become
to
is
preceded by the
mere noun, and
article the,
will take neither
an object nor an adverb modifier.
We
Books
can say, " By reading good books we improve the mind."

the
is
of reading.
object
But
if
we
insert
the
before
govern books ; as, " By

the reading of good books we improve the mind." We can say
"By walking rapidly," but we cannot say "By the walking
we must use
reading,
preposition
to
rapidly."
past participle, used in forming the passive
The
7.
really
voice,
construction
has the
of
an
adjective,
modifying the subject.

"
In
The
was
lesson
was a studied
lesson.
studied,"
studied belongs to lesson ; it

was studied should
In parsing, however,
be parsed together as the indicative, past, passive of study.

Was can be parsed separately as the indicative, past, of be, and
studied as the passive participle, past, of study, having the
construction
When
8.
and
of an
adjective,
modifying lesson.
a participle has the construction of a noun,
same time may have an object or an adverb

it is called a Gerund by some authors.
at the
modifier,
9.
10.
Write two sentences, each containing a gerund.
Write a
construction of
1.
2.
An
An
sentence having a participle with the
adjective, not in the predicate.

adjective, in the predicate.
18
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
274
A
A
A
A
A
A
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
noun, having an object.

noun, having an adverb modifier.
noun, preceded by
//^^.
noun, used as subject.
noun, used as object of a verb.

noun, used as object of a preposition.
Write one sentence for each of the constructions
11.
mentioned
in
paragraph 10 (except the
fifth),
using
in-
finitives instead of participles.
Write a sentence containing an
12.
infinitive
modify an adverb.
LESSON
XXIII
REVIEW
I.
The
As
to
following
form ...
is
the outline of the verb
used
to
PARSING
275
f
Voice
active.
passive.
I
f
indicative.
potential.
Mode
imperative.
!
Properties
r
\
subjunctive.
present.
present-perfect.
past.
J
Tense
past-perfect.
future.
future-perfect.
same
Person and number
as subject.
LESSON XXIV
PARSING
Diagram these
and parse the
sentences,
infinitives
and participles
1
" Let
the ballads of a nation," says Fletcher,

who makes the laws.'"
makes the laws, is the object of a preposition
me make
''and
The
who
clause,
Care
understood.
2.
How
3.
is
care not
intransitive.
I am to see you again

have more money than I know what to do with.
glad
I
"^"""^
have
money
I
(that
is
much)
than
to
do
what
know
I
I
=^
(which)
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
2/6
For a man
7.
to give his opinion of what he sees but in

an unjustifiable piece of rashness and folly.
If you do not wish a man to do a thing, get him to talk
about it.
Imperial Csesar, dead and turned to clay.
Might stop a hole to keep the wind away.
Sorrow's crown of crowns is remembering happier
8.
It is
4.
part, is
5.
6.
things.
a custom more honored in the
breach
than in
the observance.
tree of liberty only grows when watered by the
blood of tyrants.
10. Better to love amiss than nothing to have loved.
a joy divided is doubled.
11. A sorrow shared is halved
12. The auditorium is capable of seating three thousand
9.
The
people.
13.
14.
15.
Some
persecutor who inflicts nothing which he is not

ready to endure, deserves some respect.
mountain rises there, called Ida, joyous once with
leaves and streams, deserted now like a forbidden
thing.
to
poets, before beginning to write
be
a poem, wait
inspired.
LESSON XXV
THE ADVERB
1.
Modal adverbs may be divided

1
2.
3.
4.
2.
that
into
Those of reasoning as, hence, therefore.

Those of affirmation; 2js>, certainly indeed.
Those of negation as, not., nowise.
Those of doubt as, possibly., perhaps.
;
conjunctive adverb modifies only one word, and
word
is
in the
dependent
clause.
It is often stated that a conjunctive adverb sometimes modifies

two words, one in each clause, but it is much better to consider the
dependent clause as the modifier of the word

pendent clause.
entire
in the inde-
THE ADVERB
When
3.
dependent adjective clause
clause by a conjunctive
the independent
adverb
is
1.
277
sometimes called a relative adverb

This
is
joined to
is
adverb, the
;
as
the place where (in which) the hero
2.
He
3.
The Indians were
lived in the land
fell.
where the orange grows.
driven to the reservation whence they
came.
It will
sition with a relative
The words
4.
is
equivalent to a prepo-
usually conjunctive
adverbs are not
be noticed that a relative adverb
pronoun
for its object.
always such.
In "
adverb.
do not know where he lives," where is not a conjunctive

It is an interrogative adverb in an indirect question, and
modifies lives.
Sometimes
5.
it
difficult to
is
decide whether a verb
should be followed by a predicate adjective or an ad-
The
verb modifier.
following sentences are correct:
2.
The milk tastes sour.

The speaker's voice sounded
3.
We
4.
5.
6.
The
He
He
shrill.
arrived safe.
grass looks fresh and green.
appeared prompt.
appeared promptly.
(What
difference in the
mean-
ing of these two sentences ?)
very bad.
7.
I feel
8.
The young
In such sentences,
lady looks sad.
when
the
word following the verb

it
the third sentence, safe does not
the
tell
is
used to
should be an adjective.
express the condition of the subject,
manner of our
In
arriving, but
our condition after we had arrived.
The adverbs
6
ify
yes^ no,
amen,
etc.,
sometimes mod-
an entire clause or sentence.
7.
The words
to-day, to-night, to-morrow, etc.,
though
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
2/8
usually called adverbs, are nouns in the objective case
without a governing word.

Compare to-tnorrow and
morrow,'' and " He will come
Such expressions as as long
8.
He came
came-, the
ond as
come
as soon as,
to-
etc.,
Soon is an adverb modifying

an adverb of degree, modifying soon; the secconjunctive adverb, modifying could (come), and
as soon as he could."
first
is
as,
will
be taken together as conjunctions.
are not to
"
Wednesday in " He
Wednesday."
as
is
connects the subordinate clause to the
first as.
The
subordinate
an adverb clause of degree, modifying the first as. In

" He reads as well as he writes," as well as is parsed just as as
soon as in the preceding sentence.
In " He, as well as his sister,
clause
is
is
expected," as well as
The word
9.
In
"The more
"
the
is
is
parsed as a conjunction.
sometimes a conjunctive adverb.
examined
it,
the better
liked
it,"
the principal
The first the is a conjunctive adverb, modifying more and
liked.
connecting the dependent clause to the second the ; more is an
adverb of degree, modifying examined', the second the is an adverb
clause
is,
liked
it
the better."
Better
is
examined it
; the dependent clause, " I
an adverb clause of degree, and modifies the second the.
of degree, modifying better

the more,"
10.
is
An
adverb sometimes modifies a preposition or a
phrase.
I.
Fools judge only by events.

cr
"^ events.
only
2.
3.
4.
5.
The guard stood just below the gate.

The dogs were beaten nearly to death.
The sun shines even on the wicked.
The speaker went entirely beyond the
tesy.
limits of cour-
PREPOSITION
279
Write two sentences, each having
II.
1.
2.
3.
An
4.
As used
5.
6.
A conjunctive adverb.
A relative adverb.
An
An
adjective in predicate, denoting condition.

as a conjunctive adverb.
adverb modifying a preposition.

adverb modifying a phrase.
LESSON XVI
PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS
In such sentences as
1.
sea,"
from over
having sea for
is
"He came
usually called a
object.
its
from over the
compound
preposition,
Fro^n can be considered a
having the phrase over the sea as
sirnple preposition,
its
object.
as,
2.
The preposition is frequently incorrectly
"The ball is the size of an orange."
omitted
As the sentence reads, size is a predicate noun, and must theremean the same thing as the subject, ball. But the ball is not
size ; it has size, and is large or small.
The sentence should read,
"The ball is of the size of an orange." The phrase, of the size,"
fore
'"
is
an adjective phrase in the predicate, and modifies
Other examples are

1
2.
3.
4.
3.
dall.
There is no use trying.

It was the length of my arm.
What use is this to him?
He is worthy better treatment.
Some
tences as "
authors call as a preposition in such senI
like
him as a teacher," and
as an ambassador."
"
He came
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
280
It seems much better to me to call as in such sentences simply

an introductory word. Teacher agrees with hijn in case, ambassador agrees with he. Even in '' His reputation as a teacher is
excellent,"
with
believe teacher
is in
the possessive case, in apposition
his.
TJian
4.
sometimes called a preposition, but most
is
authors agree that

In the sentence, "
by a
as objective, used
it
not.
is
Than whom no one
whom
is wiser,''
parsed
is
figure of speech for the nominative.
prefer
than a preposition in this sentence, and to parse whom as its

If we begin the sentence with the subject, the sentence will
object.
read, "No one is wiser than he (is)."
to call
In such sentences as "
5.
some
bushel,"
Wheat
is
worth a dollar a
a a preposition, used
call
the
in
same
sense as the Latin per.
The
6.
correct preposition to be used after certain
words can be learned only by observing good speakers
and
writers.
accuse
7.
of,
few examples are given
confide
of, differ
from, founded on, rely on.
Coordinate conjunctions generally connect similar
constructions, such
tense,
die
in,
two
as verbs
infinitives,
two
of
the
same mode and
participles, etc.
3.
Running and walking are good kinds of exercise. (Not

running and to walk.)
To read and to write are the essentials of an education.
3.
Did he not
(Better
him?
reading and writing.)

me his
and asked me to forgive
(Incorrect both verbs should have the
emphatic
fault
tell
form.
Correct
"Did
he
and ask," etc.)

modes and tenses are connected,
not
tell
me
his fault
When
different
repeat the subject

8.
The word
as,
or
"
He
is
went, but (he)
may
it
is
better to
return."
not a connective
when
duces an appositive, or explanatory word.
it
intro-
REVIEW
1.
Cash or
2.
The Iron Duke,
credit
is
(A
connective.)
or Wellington,
commanded
necessary.
and Prussians
lish
In the second sentence, or
When
omitted.
or
is
281
at
the Eng(Not a connective.)
merely introductory, and can be
is
thus used,
Waterloo.
think
it
ought to be preceded by
a comma, but authors do not agree in doing so.

9.
Write two sentences

1.
2.
3.
preposition
is
in
which
incorrectly omitted.
Some authors would call as a preposition.

The two uses of or are illustrated.
LESSON XXVII
REVIEW
1.
In each of these sentences there
is
an adjective
phrase used as attribute complement

1
Europe was
at war.
2.
This lady
of royal blood.
3.
Life
of short duration.
5.
The passions of some men seem under no control.

The whole community is of the same opinion.
6.
In slumbers of midnight the sailor-boy lay.
4.
Many
is
is
carelessly parse the phrases in the preceding sentences as
adverb phrases.
Remember
the
word
2.
that a preposition
shows the
relation of
its
object to
that the phrase modifies.
Write three sentences, each containing an adjective
phrase used as attribute complement.

3.
Parse the prepositions
paragraph
i.
in
the sentences given in
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
282
DIFFICULT SENTENCES ANALYZED
The
1.
citizens believe that they are not in the
"In the wrong"

In shows the
they.
He
2.
AND PARSED*
is
wrong.
a prepositional, adjective phrase, modifying
wrong
relation of
to they.
win the esteem of
lived so as to
all his
neigh'
bors.
This
a complex sentence, of which "
is
and
principal clause,
" to
The
the subordinate clause.
understood,
neighbors
the
full
win the esteem of
clause
lived
so "
is
the
his neighbors " is
predicate of the subordinate clause is

being " to win the esteem of all his
The subordinate clause is an adverb

As is a conjunctive adverb, modify-
or requires)."
(is,
modifying the adverb
clause,
He
all
so.
ing the predicate of the subordinate clause, and connecting the two
(Some authors may
clauses.
call
as a relative pronoun in this
sentence.)
He
3.
fell in love.
Fell does not have
same
usual meaning here, but means nearly the
its
In love
as beca7ne.
is
an adjective phrase, and forms part of
the predicate.
4.
He
Fell to
Laughhig
laughing.
I
5.
fell to
is
is
is
is
am
to.
Like
is
the object of to or unto understood.
done.
This idiomatic expression

fact.
Done is an adjective.
6.
the meaning of began.
verb, used with
the object of fell
One
am
laughing like one out of his right mind.
compound
is
passive in form, but
is
not passive in
through eating.
Through is an adjective, used as done in the preceding sentence

Eating is the object of a preposition (with) understood.
used.
*The remainder
of the
bok
is
not divided into lessons.
DIFFICULT SENTENCES ANALYZED.

was
It
7.
to
This sentence
me
283
that he spoke.
correct idiomatic English, but
it cannot be
It is equivalent to " It was
posed of by the rules of grammar.
whom he spoke," which is easily analyzed.
is
The swans on
8.
still
Mary's lake
St.
disI
to
float double,
swan and shadow.

Swan and shadow
an adjective in predicate.
nouns of another clause
Double
is
" They
predicate
float
swan
are
and
shadow."
Be
9.
Of
the
of the
same mind, one toward another.
same viind
10.
In
order
must put heart

In order
may
all
" One be of the
Toward another probably
another."
in his
be taken as the
Texas
is
one
work.
means the same as

infinitive.
to succeed,
Some will
a preposition, and parse to succeed as

11.
modifies fnvid.
succeed in any undertaking,
to
to succeed
One may be parsed as

same mind toward
an adjective phrase.
is
the subject of another clause
more than
its
and
believe
it
prefer to call in order
object.
three
times as large as
Kansas.
complex sentence. " Texas is more " is the principal clause.

subordinate clause, " (Extant) three times as large as Kansas
much)," modifies more.
Than is the connective, a conjunctive
The
(is
adverb.
Of
the subordinate clause, extent, understood,
is
the sub-
modified by large.
Large is modified by as, an adverb of

degree.
As is modified by times, a noun in the objective case without a governing word.
As is also modified by the subordinate
clause, '^ Kansas (is large)."
The second as is a conjunctive
ject,
adverb, connecting the clause, " Kansas
is
large," to the first as,
and
modifying large.
Analyze these sentences, and parse the words

I.
Whoso sheddeth man's

be shed.
blood, by
man
in italics
shall his
blood
284
2.
Worth
is
3.
Many
world be worth thy winnings think, oh! think

worth enjoying.
If the
an adjective.
My Antonio,
am
it
all on fire.
5.
My Antonio, I am all on fire

My Antonio, am standing on fire.
6.
It is Setter to
7.
It is easier to
4.
Think
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
be right than to be president \\s, good).

be (he, him) than to be myself.
parse president and 7nyself in the nominative case.
will
carefully.
8.
A few suggestions
9.
Outward conduct
be ofpractical value.
of little value except as an indication
will
is
of inward thinking.
Except is a preposition, having indication as its object. As is
merely introductory.
10. Yet outward conduct jnust be looked to as the most
faithful expression of feeling.
11.
He
fell
asleep.
The dollars and cents are thought ofdiS

13. They love each other.
Each may modify other.^ but the better way is
12.
ono. price.
to
parse
it
in
apposition with they.

14.
They
15.
am
love one ajiother.
a very foolish, fond old man, fourscore and
up-
ward.
17.
The light burns dim.

The fisherman stood aghast.
18.
To
16.
the
Dmids, the
mistletoe, a parasitic
evergreen
seemed
especially
plant growing on certain
trees,
sacred.
For mine own part, I shall be glad to learn of noble

men.
20. The less you have to do with firearms, the better.
The entire sentence is, " (It is) the better, the less you have to do
with firearms." Less modifies some noun (care, attention) understood, the object of have. To do has the construction of an adjective,
and modifies the understood noun. Some may consider less the
19.
object of have.
21.
He
is
expected
to come.
To come has the construction of an
adjective.
22.
23.
Truth, crushed to earth, shall rise again.

Orators are like the wind.
24.
beautiful behavior
is
better than a beautiful /i7r;.
285
25.
These are Clan-Alpine's warriors true

And, Saxon, I am Roderick Dhu.
26.
Some
27.
have greatness thmst upon them.

What you make of life it will be to you.
28.
29.
some achieve
are born great,
Where your
treasure
is,
and some
greatness,
there will your heart be also.
True honor, as defined by Cicero,

approbation of good men.
30. I remember its bemg done.

Being done has the construction of a noun
is
concurrent
the
objective
the
in
case.
31.
32.
33.
have found a plant answerifig \o the description.

remember, I remember, the house where I was born.
Sifice then, he has resided in Virginia.
I
I& since a preposition
36.
He who judges least, I think, is he who judges best.

I am sorry to hear it.
Do not expect to govern others unless you have learned
37.
how to govern yourself.

The predominant passion
34.
35.
of Franklin seems
to
have
been the love of the useful.

38.
His conduct was,
39.
bad taste.
Columbus felt
under
there
that
the
circumstances, in very
was a continent
to
be dis-
covered.
40.
41.
The
That ought to have been thought of.

For a man to confess his faults is noble.
object
oi for
is
man
objective subject of to confess.

sition
to
Man
the
confess
his faults.
noun
not the object of a prepo-
and the objective subject of an
is
infinitive at the
same
is
time.
Correct where necessary, analyze the sentences, and

parse the words in
italics:
1.
We
2.
He
3.
reason and religion.

Be so kind as to read this letter.
They need not be alarmed.
4.
should not be overcome totally by present events.

lived in a manner agreeably to the dictates of
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
286
5.
When
He
not poor, but
is
is
respectable.
in the course of the sentence
we pass from
the affirmative
to the negative, or the contrary, the subject should be repeated.

6.
Anger glances into the heart of a wise man, but

only in the bosom of fools.
Remember
cases,
coordinate conjunctions
that
modes, tenses,
7.
To
will rest
usually
connect same
differently
mark a base
etc.
profess regard
and acting
mind.
vy(^ 8.
9.
He was
It is
a teacher, but
now
is
a lawyer.
no more but what he ought
to do.
12.
come of themselves.
Trust not him whom you know is dishonest.
Trust not him who you know to be dishonest.
13.
It is
14.
This word
15.
There are oak trees and walnut

on the former are walnuts
10.
11.
Neither good nor
so clear as
is
it
evil
needs no explanation.
only found in Shakespeare.

trees
;
in
that
and on the
grove
latter are
acorns.
16.
An
oak tree and a walnut tree are standing on the
hill
the one bears walnuts, and the other bears acorns.

17.
Cato, before he durst give himself the fatal blow, spent
18.
None knew thee but to love thee.

Somebody told me, but I forgot whom.
Would that my brother was here.
the night in reading Plato's Immortality.
19.
20.
on your coming
23.
good season.
was composed of two gases.
Great benefits may be derived from reading of good
24.
21.
22.
rely
We learned
in
that the air
books.
fondness for display
is,
of
all
other
follies,
the most
ridiculous.
25.
No
26.
Six months' interest are due.
one (beside, besides, except) the immediate family

was present at the funeral.
27.
He
28.
You might come
29.
Here
is
a friend of the teacher's.
is
seems to make the child sick, boil

worth by poverty depressed.
30.
If fresh milk
31
Slow
for at least a (few, couple of) days.
a fresh basket of eggs.
rises
it.
ANALYSIS AND DIAGRAMING
287
SENTENCES FOR ANALYSIS AND DIAGRAMING

1.
No man
2.
Flowers are
3.
The
is
so wise that he cannot learn more.

like familiar friends that we love to meet.
ni
5.
kill that people are apt

have resisted their bullets.
He that cannot forgive Others breaks the bridge over
which he himself must pass.
He that observeth the winds shall not sow, and he that
6.
The
7.
8.
Nitrous oxide, or laughing-gas, produces insensibility.

No man is so fortunate as always to be successful.
9.
We
crocodile
is
so difficult to
to imagine that the scales
4.
regardeth the clouds shall not reap.

faster
you go, the sooner you
know what we
are,
but
will
reach home.
we know not what we may
be.
10.
From
the lowest depths there
is
a path to the loftiest
height.
11.
12.
"Nothing,'' says Quintilian,

" dries sooner than tears."
We
quoting
look for a new heaven and a
new
from
Cicero,
earth wherein
dwelleth righteousness.
13.
not, O man! at the shortness of time, if thou

more than is well employed.
We may not be able to accomplish all we desire, but
shall we therefore sit still with folded hands ?
Murmur
hast
14.
15.
It is true
that the sun pours
cheerily
16.
17.
18.
down
his
golden flood as
on the poor man's cottage as on the
19.
rich
man's palace.
The Chinese pitcher plant is quite common in Ceylon,
where it is called the monkey cup, because the
monkeys sometimes open the lid and drink the water
when there is no spring of water where they can
quench their thirst.
none go
'Tis with our judgments as wdth our watches
just alike, yet each believes his own.
It was Watt who told George II that he dealt in an
power.
article of which kings were said to be fond
Nor is it given us to discern what forged her cruel
chain of moods, what set her feet in solitudes.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
288
20.
Both
Pitt
and Wellington were great men; the former
in peace, the latter in war.
24.
teach an old dog new tricks.

was told this story while we were traveling in Egypt.
He was offered a large sum of money for his vote.
And the voice that was calmer than silence said, " Lo,
25.
Be
21.
22.
23.
You cannot
I
26.
be not afraid."
ours to hope and to prepare, under a firm and
settled persuasion, that, living and dying, we are his.
He made no secret of my having v/ritten the review.
27.
Teach me
28.
The
it is I
it
to hide the fault
see.
sight of in the
darkness of the
All persons are forbidden to trespass
on these grounds.
ship was lost
night.
29.
30.
31.
guarded tent.
The Turk lay dreaming of the hour
When Greece, her knee in suppliance bent,
Should tremble at his power.
There is no need that she be present.
At midnight,
in his
Correct where necessary, analyze, and diagram
6.
All are gone but him and me.

He is the man whom I told you about.
They came just behind father and I.
Richard is himself again.
It was the one whom you said it was.
God seems to have made him what he was.
7.
8.
As many
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
horse costs three times as

as
came were
much
as a cow.
satisfied.
Such as are virtuous are happy.
The
fugitive
threatened to shoot
whomever
tried
stop him.
knew the man
who the general appointed captain.

You cannot reap until after you sow.
The higher the bird îes, the more out of danger it is.
Of all the other Roman orators, Cicero is most reI
nowned.
15.
16.
17.
18.
to
have no other hope but this.

A whole month has passed since you have arrived.
The Mississippi has been very high this year.
The Ohio has been very high last month.
I
COMPOSITION
289
COMPOSITION
Our
best literary productions are
made up
cious combination of simple, complex,
sentences, and of
many
of a judi-
and compound
varieties of each.
Too many
break the sense too often, and

a succession of complex or compound sentences is tireshort, simple sentences
some
to the reader or the Ustener.
much practice in expanding and

combining short statements, and in contracting and
breaking up long sentences. They should also have
much drill in expressing the same thought in different
ways. Any reading book or magazine will furnish good
material for such exercises.
A few examples are given
This old soldier receives a pension. He was wounded.
Pupils should have
This wounded soldier receives a pension.

This old soldier, having been wounded, receives
2.
pension.
This old
3.
soldier,
having received a wound, draws a
pension.
5.
This old soldier receives a pension, because he was

wounded.
Because this old soldier was wounded, he receives a
6.
This old
4.
pension.
soldier
was wounded, and he
receives
pension.
who was wounded,
7.
This old
8.
Having been wounded,
soldier,
receives a pension.
this old soldier receives a
pen-
rained very hard.
The
sion.
1.
The
river
was high.
It
bridge was carried away.

2.
is
The country on both sides of the lower Mississippi

The country is protected by levees. These
very low.
levees sometimes break.

19
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
290
3.
We
crossed the ocean in a large steamer.
landed at Liverpool.
The
New
is in
4.
Liverpool
Yoi'k.
name was
We
City of
England.
good composition contains many different kinds

Therefore, pupils should be familiar with
of sentences.
many
steamer's
kinds of sentences.
Change these simple sentences

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
to
complex
Honest people will be trusted.

I expected him to go.
Quarrelsome persons are disagreeable.
With patience he might have succeeded.
The manner of his escape is a mystery.
6.
The
7.
After sunset the rain
8.
9.
By
clouds having passed away, the sun shone again.
believe
him
fell
in torrents.
to be honest.
trying to rescue the child, he was drowned.
Many books on grammar and
composition contain a
long Hst of subjects for written work, but every teacher
can select topics better adapted
to the
than those selected by any author.
needs of
For
but few topics are given here.

I.
THE ADVENTURES OF A PENNY
Tell where the material was found.
Tell where and
Who
first
when
obtained
it
was coined.
from the mint, and how.

has been spent, and what for.
it
How many times it

Where it is now, and
its
probable future.
his class
this reason,
COMPOSITION
THE
II.
LIFE OF A
291
CANARY BIRD
Imagine a canary bird telling all about what has happened

from the first day of his life.
Where he has lived.
The scenery and climate of his native home.
What he has done.
What he thinks of some of the people he has seen.
III.
to
him
THREE PEOPLE
Imagine three people in a room. Describe and name them.

Tell what they are doing, and what they are talking about.
Tell some of the things they say.
Tell where they go as they leave the room.
A BROOK
IV.
Describe a brook winding about

the woods.
Tell where
What
it
among the meadows and through
starts from.
on its way.
Describe the flowers and trees on its bank.
Tell about a shady pool in one place, and what is found
Tell about a shallow place with pebbles on the bottom.
Tell how people cross it.
it
finds
What makes
it
grow
V. IF
larger.
Where
it
COULD DO AS
in
it.
finally goes.
PLEASED
Imagine that you are now able to do just what you please state
several things that you would do, and give your reasons for doin<
them.
;
*;'
VI.
COLUMBUS
Imagine that you w^re a companion of

Describe his efforts to procure aid,
voyage, the voyage, the discovery of
the country and its inhabitants, the
Columbus.
the
land,
preparation for
the
return,
the
the
appearance of
reception
in
Spain.
All the preceding subjects require the use of the

imagination, but subjects for real description and true
narration are easily found.
"
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
292
CAPITALS
capital letter should be used
For
For
For
For
For
2.
3.
4.
5.
the
first letter
of every sentence.
the
first letter
of every proper noun.
the
first letter
of every line of poetry.
the
first letter
of every direct quotation.
the
first letter
of every abbreviation that represents
a proper noun.
For initials that represent proper nouns.

For the words / and O.
For the first letter of all names applied to the Deity.
For the first letter of a strongly personified object
" Come, O life-giving Hope
6.
7.
8.
9.
as,
PUNCTUATION
COMMA
The comma should be used
1.
To
name
separate the
of the person addressed from
the remainder of the sentence.

2.
To
separate the words of a series.
seldom used
The word and
is
between the last two,

used between every two, no comma
in a series, except
but if ajid is
should be used.
3.
4.
5.
To
separate two adjectives modifying the
To
set
off"
words, phrases, and clauses out of their
natural order,
6.
7.
To
To
set
set
off"
8.
and non-restrictive
clauses.
a noun clause used as attribute complement.
off"
long, or
9.
same noun
when a7id is omitted.

To show omission of a word or words, especially in
writing a name and its address," and dates; as,
John Wilson^ Boston^ Mass. ; July 4, i8g6.
a noun clause used as the subject,

ends with a verb.
if it
is
if it
To set off" parenthetical

To set off appositives,
expressions.
unless short and used as part
of the name.
10.
To
set
off"
participial phrases
not restrictive.
and
relative clauses
when
PUNCTUATION
293
After as, to wit, namely, etc., when they introduce

examples or illustrations.
as,
12. To separate pairs of words joined by conjunctions
"Sink or swim, live or die, survive or perish, I give
11.
my hand and my
heart to this vote."
PERIOD
A period
1.
should be used
At the close of each
declarative
and imperative sen-
tence.
2.
3.
After each initial.

After every abbreviation.
INTERROGATION POINT
The
interrogation point should be used at the close of
every interrogative sentence.

The
interrogation point is not used at the close of an indirect

;
as, " He asked me if I knew who wrote the book.'''
question
EXCLAMATION POINT
The exclamation
tions (except O),
point should be used after interjec-
and usually
at the
end of exclamatory
phrases and sentences.
THE SEMICOLON
The semicolon should be used
1.
Before as, to wit, natnely,
amples or
2.
etc.,
when followed by
ex-
illustrations.
separate clauses having parts separated by commas.
To
THE COLON
The
colon
1.
2.
is
used
Before a quotation when formally introduced by thus,

as follows, etc.
Usually after the complimentary address at the beginning of a letter as, ''Dear Sir: In answer to yours,"
;
etc.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR
294
THE HYPHEN
The hyphen
1.
is
Between
used
syllables
when they
are divided at the end of a
line.
2.
To
join the parts of a
compound word.
QUOTATION MARKS
Quotation marks should be used to inclose words and
sentences taken from another.
quotation within a quotation
is
inclosed by single marks.
Notice the location of the interrogation

quotation marks in these sentences
1
2.
Did you hear
He
me go "
Where am I ? "
the boy say, " Let
heard the boy say, "
point and
RETURN EDUCATION -PSYCHOLOGY LIBRARY

642-4209
TO 2600 Tolman Hall
LOAN PERIOD
MONTH
BOOKS MAY
ALL
2-
BE RECALLED AFTER 7 DAYS

hour books must be renewed in person
Return to desk from which borrowed
DUE AS STAMPED BELOW

-k 2S0,
'-Iz^lsi
SEmstmtom
DECiSim
SUBJECT TH RECAli
WCD
HUB i0*8i
WW
FACULTY LOAf JlUL
^^^
1 9 iqqC
SffRfFrr
lECEfVEt)
SEP
it)
1990-;^PM
(nMr.r>!V|-M
um/\RY
FORM NO. DDIO, 10m,
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY

1/78
BERKELEY, CA 94720
(g)S
U.C.
BERKELEY LIBRARIES
iliilll
CX'
'^
niCi-iZj
,^
(jU^
v^
/f..
f'î^^' %<3
X
y

Completeenglishg00hoenrich PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Descrizione originale:

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Completeenglishg00hoenrich PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

W^^'

COMMON AND HIGH SCHOOLS

LATE PRESIDENT OF KANSAS NORMAL COLLEGE, AND

AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY

1895, 1897, 1907,

HOBNSHEL ENG. GRAM.

grammar has been thoroughly

and entirely reset

complete book, containing

one volume the work

usually found in books on language lessons

divided into four parts, each of which

three parts treat of the

each gives a more comprehensive

treatment than the preceding.

only with the most

Part Four deals

and those about which

authors do not agree.

The author has no sympathy with the notion that

children cannot learn and understand the

verd, for instance,

Therefore, technical work will

be found in Part One, gradually becoming more

cult as the pupil advances, until in Part Four will be

It is believed that pupils

the beginning of the

should begin this book about

with the work in other studies, or

special oral lessons.

The distinguishing characteristics of the book are

use of brief and terse language

models for analysis and parsing.

simplest and most comprehensive system of

writing will be required of the pupil.

But few subjects and outlines for composition work

each teacher can select

better suited to the capacity

of his pupils than the topics selected

course, and should

introduced early in the

be continued until the pupil can

write a neat and correct letter.

be noticed that the pupil

be increased rather than diminsentences written

This part of the work should not be

the teacher thinks those given in the book

are not sufficient.

divided into lessons, but

vinced the author that parsing pays

grades has con-

done, and that there cannot be good parsing unless a

and logical order

called to the diagrams.

simple, yet comprehensive.

comes nearer indicating

the part of speech of every word than any other system

The aim should be, not to diaThe diagram is

only an aid to analysis.

pupil that has mastered the

intended only for advanced students.

Are, Was, and